HomeMy WebLinkAboutReport SPECIFICATIONS
Clean Water Services
Durham O&M Building Remodel — Phase la
CWS Project No. 6687
CITY OF TIGARD
Division 1 - 1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE
Approved* I( j
Permit#: gOP7CN4 -cz,2c
Address: I Lo
Permit Set suite #: r
By _.. Date ' 'o( --
OFFICE COPY
August 2014
MWA
Architects
acailWater Services
RECEIVED
AUG 252Ui4
CRC* I K AtHL)
BUILDII(rN10N
SPECIFICATIONS
Clean Water Services
Durham O&M Building Remodel — Phase 1a
CWS Project No. 6687
Division 1 - 16
Permit Set
August 2014
MWA
19' Architects
Clean Water Services
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01061 Bidder Design Requirements
01090 Quality Assurance
01140 Work Restrictions
01292 Schedule of Values
01300 Temporary Facilities
01310 Project Management
01324 Construction Schedule
01329 Safety Plan
01330 Submittal Procedures
01400 Cleaning Up
01450 Quality Control
01455 Special Tests and Inspections
01524 Construction Waste Management
01560 Temporary Environmental Controls
01732 Concrete Moisture Vapor Emissions Ph Testing
01770 Closeout Procedures
DIVISION 2: NOT USED
DIVISION 3: NOT USED
DIVISION 4: NOT USED
DIVISION 5: METALS
05310 Steel Deck
05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DIVISION 6: WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry
06412 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets
DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 Building Insulation
07543 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing
07591 Preparation for Re-Roofing
07920 Joint Sealants
August 2014 Table of Contents-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
DIVISION 8: OPENINGS
08411 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09111 Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing
09250 Gypsum Board
09512 Acoustical Tile Ceilings
09651 Resilient Floor Tile
09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories
09912 Interior Painting
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10522 Fire Protection Cabinets
DIVISION 11: NOT USED
DIVISION 12: NOT USED
DIVISION 13: NOT USED
DIVISION 14: NOT USED
4 DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL
15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements
15053 Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates
15054 Access Doors and Panels
15140 Anchors, Hangers and Supports
15190 Mechanical Identification
15250 Mechanical Insulation
15300 Fire Protection
15891 Sheet Metal Ductwork
15899 Flexible Ductwork
15910 Ductwork Accessories
15940 Grilles and Diffusers
15990 System Balance
DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
16010 General
16040 Identification
16050 Basic Materials and Methods
16110 Conduits, Raceways, Boxes and Fittings
16120 Conductors and Connectors
16123 Wiring Devices and Plates
August 2014 Table of Contents-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
16180 Overcurrent Devices
16450 Grounding
16500 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
16721 Fire Alarm System
011
August 2014 Table of Contents-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01061
BIDDER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01061-01 GENERAL
A. SUMMARY:
Provide bidder design components in accordance with Contract Documents.
B. CODES AND REFERENCES:
1. 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
2. 2014 Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code.
3. 2011 Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code.
4. 2011 Oregon Electrical Specialty Code.
5. 2014 Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code.
6. 2014 Oregon Fire Code.
01061-02 DESCRIPTION
A. WORK SUMMARY: Certain components of Project's construction are
designated Bidder Design. Bidder Design components are defined as complete
systems provided for the intended use.
1. The Contractor is responsible to coordinate and assume or assign to
subcontractors and/or suppliers complete responsibility for design, calculations,
submittals, permits if required, fabrication, delivery and installation of Bidder
Design components.
B. BIDDER DESIGN COMPONENTS:
1. The following are Bidder Design components known at this time to
require deferred submittal to the Architect and also plan review and permitting by
City of Tigard Community Development Department:
a. Section 05400—Cold-Formed Metal Framing.
b. Section 08411 —Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
c. Section 09500—Acoustical ceiling suspension system.
d. Section 15300 - Fire protection system, including fire alarms.
C. SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings for all Bidder Design components shall be
submitted to the Architect for review, prior to submittal to the permitting jurisdiction.
1. Review of Bidder Design submittals is for general conformance with
design intent. Neither the Owner nor the Architect is responsible for coordination
of Bidder Design components with Contract Documents or review of materials
submitted as result of Bidder Design components. Review does not lessen nor
August 2014 01061-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
shift burden of responsibility from Contractor or assigned subcontractor/supplier
to the Owner or Architect.
2. Contractor is responsible, with no exceptions, for submittal of Bidder
Design components documents for review by the Architect and the permitting
jurisdiction, City of Tigard, so that the review will not adversely affect Project's
construction schedule.
a. The Owner is not responsible to pay for delays, additional
products, hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to
failure to coordinate work with other trades or to provide components in
timely manner to meet Project schedule.
b. Submittal to Architect: Submit five (5) sets of plans, calculations
and product data sheets for review.
c. Submittal to Permitting Jurisdiction: Submit three (2) sets of
Architect reviewed plans, calculations and product data sheets together
with required permit and plan review fees.
D. PERMITTING REQUIREMENTS: Comply with current City of Tigard
requirements for deferred submittals at time of submission.
E. Additional requirements for bidder design components are specified in respective
Specification sections.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01061-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01090
QUALITY ASSURANCE
01090-01 GENERAL
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. Quality assurance.
B. RELATED SECTIONS
1. General Conditions: Reference standards.
C. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus
standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid
requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
2. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract
Documents.
3. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents.
4. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the
specific work, until Substantial Completion.
5. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
6. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract
nor those of the Architect/Engineer shall not be altered from the Contract
Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01090-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. WORK shall be scheduled, sequenced, and performed in a manner that
minimizes disruption to the public and the operation and maintenance of existing
facilities.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall incorporate the construction and schedule constraints
of this Section in preparing the construction schedules required under Section
01324, CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE.
1.02 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Utilities are currently available at the site and must be coordinated by
CONTRACTOR for installation. Electrical and telephone services are available
adjacent to the site, and any temporary connections require prior coordination with
the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and the respective Utility Agency- see
Section 01500.
1.03 BYPASSING
N/A
1.04 DEACTIVATION REQUESTS
A. Unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise, the CONTRACTOR shall not
remove from service, de-energize, or modify settings for any existing equipment,
structure, road, or any other facility without permission from the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Modifications to existing facilities, the construction of new facilities, and the
connection of new to existing facilities may require the temporary outage or
bypass of existing treatment processes or facilities. In such cases, the
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate WORK with the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
as described below. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed Deactivation
Plan and time schedule for all construction activities which will make it necessary
to remove a pipeline, channel, electrical circuit, equipment, structure, road, or
other facilities from service.
C. The Deactivation Plans shall be submitted to the ARCHITECT for acceptance a
minimum of 2 weeks in advance of the time that such deactivations are required.
The Deactivation Plans shall be coordinated with the construction schedule and
shall meet the restrictions and conditions of this Section. The Deactivation Plan
shall describe the CONTRACTOR's method of deactivation; the length of time
August 2014 01140-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
required to complete the operation; any necessary temporary power, controls,
instrumentation, or alarms required to maintain control, monitoring, and alarms for
the associated facilities; and the manpower, plant, and equipment which the
CONTRACTOR shall provide in order to ensure completion of the deactivation. All
costs for preparing and implementing the Deactivation Plans shall be the
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as part of the WORK.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall not begin an alteration affecting existing facilities until
specific written approval has been granted by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
in each case.
The OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will coordinate the CONTRACTOR's planned
procedure with OWNER personnel. The ARCHITECT or OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE have the authority to modify any proposed shutdown
procedures if such procedures would adversely impact the plant operations.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide written confirmation of the deactivation date
and time two working days prior to the actual deactivation. This notification shall
also provide confirmation that the CONTRACTOR has all the required parts,
materials, tools, and equipment on-hand to successfully undertake and complete
the deactivation.
1.05 TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS
A. The making of connections to existing facilities or other operations that interfere
with the operation of the existing equipment or process flow paths shall be
thoroughly planned in advance, and all required equipment, materials, and labor
shall be on hand at the time of undertaking the connections. WORK shall be
completed as quickly as possible and with as little delay as possible, and shall
proceed continuously (24 hours a day and 7 days a week) if necessary to
complete modifications and/or connections in the minimum time.
B. The cost of any temporary facilities and night, weekend, or holiday work and
overtime payments required during process interruptions shall be included in the
price of the WORK.
C. Temporary facilities and piping shall be located to minimize interference with
CONTRACTOR's construction facilities, OWNER's operation and maintenance of
impacted facilities, and to the public.
D. When temporary electrical power, controls, instrumentation, or alarms are
required for routine continuous operations of existing or new equipment, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary equipment and appurtenances. Prior
to installing said equipment and appurtenances, CONTRACTOR shall furnish a
submittal on the proposed components and installation for ARCHITECT's review
and approval.
E. A plan showing the size and location of the temporary facilities and piping shall be
submitted to the ARCHITECT at the same time as the Deactivation Plan required
August 2014 01140-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
under this Section. All costs for design, provision, operation, and removal of
temporary facilities and piping shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
1.06 PERMITS AND DEFERED SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall keep fully informed of all local ordinances, as well as
state and federal laws, which in any manner affect the WORK. At all times the
Contractor shall comply with said ordinances, laws, and regulations, and protect
and indemnify the OWNER and its officers and agents against any claim or
liability arising from or based on the violation of such laws, ordinances, or
regulations. All permits, licenses, and inspection fees necessary for prosecution
and completion of the WORK shall be secured and paid for by the
CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise specified.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by the conditions of all permits and shall obtain
proof of satisfaction of conditions from issuers of permits prior to acceptance of
the WORK by the OWNER.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all conditions attached to applicable local,
state and federal permits.
BUILDING CODES AND FEES
State of Oregon Building Codes:
2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
2014 Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code.
2011 Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code.
2011 Oregon Electrical Specialty Code.
2014 Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code.
2014 Oregon Fire Code.
OREGON STATE ENERGY CODE CERTIFICATES &WORKSHEETS
2014 Oregon Energy Code Compliance forms are included in these specifications.
Interior Lighting Compliance Certificate
The Americans with Disabilities Act of 2008; ADA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities, together with the 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code
(OSSC) and the referenced ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 standards govern all work on
this project. These documents have been followed in preparation of the
Construction Documents, but if any discrepancies have occurred, inform the
ARCHITECT at once so that corrections can be made. Do no work in violation of
these documents as the intent is to comply with them in all respects.
Dimensions, clearances, operation, function, mounting heights, types of
equipment, etc., are assumed to be familiar to the various trade sections involved
and all work is to be provided and installed as required by ADAAG and the OSSC.
The requirements of the OSSC govern where there are conflicting requirements.
August 2014 01140-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESS: An International Symbol of Access
shall be displayed to identify accessible features, as required, including but not
limited to the following: Required Accessible Exits.
D. The OWNER will pay for, or will apply and pay for permits with Washington
County Building Services Department. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for
obtaining the permits from Washington County Building Services Department
following completion of the CONTRACTOR's details within the appropriate
sections of the permits as required. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all
regulations and conditions of the permits and shall obtain indications of
acceptable satisfaction of conditions from Washington County Building Services
Department prior to acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE. Such regulations, conditions and requirements are made a
part of these Specifications as fully and completely as though the same were fully
set forth herein.
E. Permits Obtained After Bid Submittal: If, after the Bid submittal date, the OWNER
obtains any permits, which require changes to the WORK hereunder and thereby
cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or the time required for, the
performance of the WORK under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall submit
information sufficient for the ARCHITECT and OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE to
determine the extent of the effects on the cost and/or schedule. If the
ARCHITECT AND OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE agree the cost and/or schedule
will be affected by such changes, such effects will be handled in accordance with
the General Conditions. The OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will provide the
CONTRACTOR with a copy of any such permits or easements. Comply with all
applicable terms and conditions contained in such permits or easements.
F. Posting Permits: Post permits, as required, at the site of the WORK.
G. Deferred submittals will submitted by the Contractor to City of Tigard Community
Development Department. The cost of deferred submittals will be paid for by the
Owner.
1.07 SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS
A. General: It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to coordinate and plan the
construction activities to integrate each schedule constraint into performance of
the overall WORK.
B. The listing of schedule constraints below does not mean that all constraints or
special conditions have been identified. The list does not substitute for the
CONTRACTOR's coordination and planning for completion of the WORK within
the Contract Times.
C. Utilize description of critical events in work constraints in this Section as a
guideline for scheduling and undertaking the Work.
August 2014 01140-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1.08 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING
A. All construction activities shall be scheduled and sequenced to ensure continuous
operation of the existing conveyance and treatment facilities. The
CONTRACTOR's scheduling shall develop all construction sequencing so that the
WORK will not adversely impact conveyance or treatment. The CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible for development of the construction sequencing.
B. The following general guidelines shall be used by the CONTRACTOR in planning
the sequence of construction.
1. During all modification and demolition work, safe working conditions for
personnel shall be maintained at all times. The foregoing includes at least
proper trench excavation, the provision of temporary equipment guards,
supports, warning signs, walkways, covers over openings, hand railing,
lighting, and protection of electrical equipment and power supply.
2. All temporary facilities shall be constructed in accordance with applicable
codes and regulations to operate safely and properly.
3. Valves to be temporarily shut off during the WORK shall be tagged as such
and shall be wired shut with a crimped lead seal and padlocked for safety in
accordance with the CONTRACTOR's Safety Plan and in a manner
acceptable to the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.
4. Electrical and mechanical equipment to be temporarily shut off during the
WORK shall be locked out and tagged for safety in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR's Safety Plan and in a manner acceptable to the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01140-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01292
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. This Section defines the process whereby the Schedule of Values (lump sum
price breakdown) shall be developed. Monthly progress payment amounts shall
be determined, in part, from the monthly progress updates of the CPM Schedule
activities.
1.02 NOT USED
1.03 DETAILED SCHEDULE OF VALUES
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a detailed Schedule of Values to
the ARCHITECT within 10 days from the date of Notice to Proceed. The detailed
Schedule of Values shall be based on the accepted preliminary Schedule of
Values for major WORK components and shall be broken down by major
components. The ARCHITECT shall be the sole judge of acceptable numbers,
details and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the
ARCHITECT, a greater number of Schedule of Value items than proposed by the
CONTRACTOR is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall add the additional items
so identified by the ARCHITECT. Greater detail shall be provided as directed by
the ARCHITECT, which may include a value for each CSI specification for each
major project element.
The CONTRACTOR and ARCHITECT shall meet and jointly review the detailed
Schedule of Values within 10 days from the date of Notice to Proceed. The value
allocations and extent of detail shall be reviewed to determine any necessary
adjustments to the values. Any adjustments deemed necessary to the value
allocation or level of detail shall be made by the CONTRACTOR and a revised
detailed Schedule of Values shall be submitted within 20 days from the date of
Notice to Proceed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used. END OF SECTION
August 2014 01292-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01300
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01300-01 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES & FENCING
1. Contractor shall provide temporary structures as required for his work.
Field office building shall be provided. Locate field office within work limits, or as
arranged with Owner's representative.
01300-02 TEMPORARY WATER SUPPLY
1. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all temporary water supply used
during construction.
2. Drinking water shall be provided from proven safe source for all those
connected with the work.
01300-03 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
1. Light and Power- Energy costs for temporary light and power will be paid
for by the Contractor.
01300-04 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
1. Temporary heat and ventilation shall be provided as required and paid for
by the Contractor. Furnish heat, as required, to dry out building and work from
dampness and cold.
01300-05 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES
1. Temporary toilet facilities shall be provided for all those connected with
the work. Keep in sanitary condition.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01300-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Requests for Information (RFIs).
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of
responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01324 "Construction Schedule" for preparing and submitting Contractor's
construction schedule.
2. Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner's Representative, Architect, or Contractor seeking
information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or
interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI
in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
August 2014 01310-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect and Owner's Representative.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts
the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of
affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms:
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's and Owner's Representative's Action: Architect and Owner's
Representative's will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect
and Owner's Representative's after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the
following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract
Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Owner's Representative in
writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
August 2014 01310-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect and Owner's Representative.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's and Owner's Representative's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's and Owner's Representative's action, update the RFI log and
immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and
notify Architect and Owner's Representative within seven days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
August 2014 01310-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01324
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Scheduling of the WORK shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR in
accordance with the requirements of this Section.
B. Development of the schedule, the project status reporting requirements of the
Contract shall employ computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) scheduling.
Where submittals are required hereunder, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three
copies of each submittal item.
1.02 INITIAL SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the following at the Preconstruction Conference
which shall serve as the CONTRACTOR's Plan of Operation for the Contract
Time and to identify the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to complete
all WORK within the Contract Time.
1. Project Overview Bar Chart: The overview bar chart shall indicate the major
components of the WORK and the sequence relations between major
components and subdivisions of major components. The overview bar chart
shall indicate the relationships and time frames in which the various
components of the WORK will be made substantially complete and placed
into service in order to meet the project milestones. Sufficient detail shall be
included for the identification of subdivisions of major components into such
activities as (1) site work, (2)completion of all structural concrete, (3) major
mechanical work, (4) major electrical work, (5) instrumentation and control
work, (6)time requirements for start-up and testing, and (7) other important
work within the overall project scope. Planned durations and start dates
shall be indicated for each work item subdivision. Each major component
and subdivision component shall be accurately plotted on time scale. Not
more than four sheets shall be employed to represent this overview
information.
B. The OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and the CONTRACTOR shall meet to
review and discuss the Three-Week plan of operation and project overview bar
chart within 5 days after submittal to the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. The
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE's review and comment on the schedules will be
limited to conformance with the sequencing and milestone requirements in the
Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall make corrections to the
schedules necessary to comply with the requirements and shall adjust the
schedules to incorporate any missing information requested by the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE.
August 2014 01324-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
C. Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule Submittals: Each week, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit a schedule of planned activities and progress detailing activities for
the three-week period following the date of the weekly submission to the
ARCHITECT.
1.03 COMPLETE AND TIMELY SUBMISSIONS
A. The CPM Construction Schedule information is an integral part of the Project
scheduling and reporting. As such, it is critical information to evaluating the
project's progress and the proper planning of the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE's and ARCHITECT's work effort associated with this Project.
Accordingly, if any submittal required by this Section is found to be incomplete or
is submitted later than required, it may result in a deferral by ARCHITECT to
recommend whole or any part of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment,
either partial or final.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01324-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01329
SAFETY PLAN
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Development and maintenance of a Construction Safety Plan.
Refer to Section 00800.SC. 6.13.
1.02 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS
A. Comply with all Federal, state, and local safety and health regulations and laws
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Oregon Revised Statutes, ORS 654.
2. Oregon Safe Employment Act(OSEA).
3. Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Code of the Oregon Occupational
Safety and Health Division (OR-OSHA), Oregon Administrative Rules
(OAR), Chapter 437.
a. Division 1, General Administrative Rules.
b. Division 2, General Occupational Safety and Health Rules.
c. Division 3, Construction.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN
A. Detail the Methods and Procedures to comply with State, Federal, and Local
Health and Safety Laws, Rules and Requirements for the duration of the
Contract Times. These requirements include, but are not limited to, Oregon
Revised Statutes, Oregon Administrative Rules, Oregon Occupational Safety
and Health Regulations (OSHA), Department of Labor and Industries, Oregon
Department of Transportation, and other applicable Federal, state, and local
regulations. Include the following:
1. Identification of the Certified or Licensed Safety Consultant who will
prepare, initiate, maintain and supervise safety programs, and procedures.
2. Procedures for providing workers with an awareness of safety and health
hazards expected to be encountered in the course of construction.
3. Safety equipment appropriate to the safety and health hazards expected to
be encountered during construction. Include warning devices, barricades,
safety equipment in public right-of-way and protected areas, and safety
equipment used in multi-level structures.
4. Methods for minimizing employees' exposure to safety and health hazards
expected during construction.
5. Procedures for reporting safety or health hazards.
6. Procedures to follow to correct a recognized safety and health hazard.
7. Procedures for investigation of accidents, injuries, illnesses and unusual
events that have occurred at the construction site.
8. Periodic and scheduled inspections of general work areas and specific
work stations.
9. Training for employees and workers at the jobsite.
August 2014 01329-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
10. Methods of communication of safe working conditions, work practices and
required personal protection equipment.
B. Assume responsibility for every aspect of Health and Safety on the jobsite,
including the health and safety of Subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons
on the jobsite.
1. Forward available information and reports to the Safety Consultant who
shall make the necessary recommendations concerning worker health and
safety at the jobsite.
2. Employ additional health and safety measures specified by the Safety
Consultant, as necessary, for workers in accordance with OSHA
guidelines.
C. Transmit to OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and ARCHITECT copies of reports
and other documents related to accidents or injuries encountered during
construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01329-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Wherever submittals are required in the Contract Documents, submit them to the
ARCHITECT.
B. All submittals shall include both electronic copies and a minimum of 3 hard copies
unless additional copies are specified. Electronic copies shall be in Word, Excel,
or PDF format unless otherwise specified. Electronic copies shall be submitted
through email. The ARCHITECT will provide email addresses to CONTRACTOR
personnel as necessary. The CONTRACTOR will be required to utilize email,
including providing and utilizing necessary computers, internet services, phone
services, and other office, scheduling, and communication software programs. In
the event of discrepancy between the electronic version and paper documents,
the paper documents will govern.
C. Definitions:
1. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by the
CONTRACTOR that requires the ARCHITECT's approval. (In general, all
submittals are to be considered Action Submittals unless specifically
indicated as informational or deferred submittals in the Contract Documents.)
2. Quality Control (QC) Submittals: Information submitted by the
CONTRACTOR that does not require the ARCHITECT's approval.
3. Deferred Submittal: Information required for the review of CONTRACTOR-
designed systems (see the IBC). See drawing A-0 for list of anticipated
deferred submittals.
1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SUBMITTALS
A. Within 14 days after the date of commencement as stated in the Notice to
Proceed or at the preconstruction conference, whichever comes first, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items to the ARCHITECT for review:
1. A preliminary list of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitutes.
2. A preliminary schedule for submission of priority and major Shop Drawings
(particularly for long-lead time equipment) and Samples.
3. A list of permits and licenses the CONTRACTOR shall obtain, indicating the
agency required to grant the permit, the expected date of submittal for the
permit, and required date for receipt of the permit.
4. A preliminary schedule of values in accordance with Section 01292,
SCHEDULE OF VALUES.
5. A 3-Week Plan of Operation in accordance with Section 01324,
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE.
6. A Project Overview Bar Chart in accordance with Section 01324,
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE.
August 15, 2014 01330-1 Project 6482
7. CONTRACTOR's Health and Safety Plan in accordance with SC 6.13, and
Section 1329.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Wherever called for in the Contract Documents or where required by the
ARCHITECT, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ARCHITECT for review,
three copies plus one reproducible copy or electronic file, of each Shop Drawing
submittal. Shop Drawings may include detail design calculations, shop-prepared
drawings, fabrication and installation drawings, erection drawings, lists, graphs,
catalog sheets, data sheets, and similar items. If a list, graph, catalog sheet, data
sheet, etc. includes more that one item, clearly mark which item is the subject of
the submittal. Shop drawings shall bear the signature and seal of an engineer
registered in the appropriate engineering branch and in the state of Oregon,
unless otherwise indicated. Whenever the CONTRACTOR is required to submit
design calculations as part of a submittal, such calculations shall bear the
signature and seal of an engineer registered in the appropriate branch and in the
state of Oregon, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Shop Drawing submittals shall be accompanied by the ARCHITECT's standard
submittal transmittal form, a reproducible copy of which is available from the
ARCHITECT. A submittal without the form or where applicable items on the form
are not completed will be returned for resubmittal.
C. Organization:
1. A single submittal transmittal form shall be used for each technical
specification section or item or class of material or equipment for which a
submittal is required. A single submittal covering multiple sections will not be
acceptable, unless the primary specification references other sections for
components.
2. On the transmittal form, index the components of the submittal and insert
tabs in the submittal to match the components. Relate the submittal
components to specification paragraph and subparagraph, Drawing number,
detail number, schedule title, room number, or building name, as applicable.
3. Unless indicated otherwise, terminology and equipment names and numbers
used in submittals shall match those used in the Contract Documents.
D. Format:
1. Minimum sheet size shall be 8.5 inches by 11 inches. Maximum sheet size
shall be 22 inches by 34 inches. Every page in a submittal shall be
numbered in sequence. Each copy of a submittal shall be collated and
stapled or bound, as appropriate. The ARCHITECT will not collate sheets or
copies.
2. Where product data from a manufacturer is submitted, clearly mark which
model is proposed, with complete pertinent data capacities, dimensions,
clearances, diagrams, controls, connections, anchorage, and supports.
Sufficient level of detail shall be presented for assessment of compliance
with the Contract Documents.
3. Each submittal shall be assigned a unique number. Submittals shall be
numbered sequentially, and the submittal numbers shall be clearly noted on
the transmittal. Original submittals shall be assigned a numeric submittal
August 15, 2014 01330-2 Project 6482
number(e.g., 25). If submittal "25" requires a resubmittal, the first resubmittal
will bear the designation "25.A"and the second resubmittal will bear the
designation "25.B" and so on.
4. If there is a follow-up submittal related to a previously submitted class of
material or type of equipment (e.g., follow-up submittal to submittal "25"), it
shall be assigned the number"25.1". If submittal "25.1" requires a
resubmittal, the first resubmittal will bear the designation "25.1.A" and the
second resubmittal will bear the designation "25.1.B" and so on.
E. Disorganized and incomplete submittals that do not meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents will be returned without review.
F. Except as may otherwise be indicated, the ARCHITECT will return prints of each
submittal to the CONTRACTOR with comments noted thereon, within 14 days
following receipt by the ARCHITECT. It is considered reasonable that the
CONTRACTOR will make a complete and acceptable submittal to the
ARCHITECT by the first resubmittal on an item. The OWNER reserves the right to
withhold monies due to the CONTRACTOR to cover additional costs of the
ARCHITECT's review beyond the first resubmittal. The ARCHITECT'S maximum
review period for each submittal or resubmittal will be 14 days.
G. If a submittal is returned to the CONTRACTOR marked "NO EXCEPTIONS
TAKEN," formal revision and resubmission will not be required.
H. If a submittal is returned marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED,"
CONTRACTOR shall make the corrections on the submittal, but formal revision
and resubmission will not be required. When applicable, provide as-built
documentation in final Operation and Maintenance manuals or on as-built
drawings.
I. If a submittal is returned marked "AMEND-RESUBMIT," the CONTRACTOR shall
revise it and shall resubmit the required number of copies to the ARCHITECT for
review. Resubmittal of portions of multi-page or multi-drawing submittals will not
be allowed. For example, if a Shop Drawing submittal consisting of 10 drawings
contains one drawing noted as "AMEND RESUBMIT," the submittal as a whole is
deemed "AMEND RESUBMIT," and 10 drawings are required to be resubmitted.
J. If a submittal is returned marked "REJECTED-RESUBMIT," it shall mean either
that the proposed material or product does not satisfy the specification, the
submittal is so incomplete that it cannot be reviewed, or is a substitution request
not submitted in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01631,
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS. In the first two cases, the CONTRACTOR shall
prepare a new submittal and shall submit the required number of copies to the
ARCHITECT for review. In the latter case, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the
substitution request according to the General Conditions.
K. Resubmittal of rejected portions of a previous submittal will not be allowed. Every
change from a submittal to a resubmittal or from a resubmittal to a subsequent
resubmittal shall be identified and flagged on the resubmittal.
August 15, 2014 01330-3 Project 6482
L. Submittals shall be carefully reviewed by an authorized representative of the
CONTRACTOR prior to submission to the ARCHITECT. Each submittal shall be
dated and signed by the CONTRACTOR as being correct and in conformance
with the Contract Documents. In the case of Shop Drawings, each sheet shall be
so dated and signed. Any deviations from the Contract Documents shall be noted
by the CONTRACTOR on the transmittal form and such deviation shall only be
allowed if approved in writing by the ARCHITECT and OWNER. The ARCHITECT
will only review submittals that have been so verified by the CONTRACTOR.
Nonverified submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR without action taken
by the ARCHITECT, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
M. Corrections or comments made on the CONTRACTOR's Shop Drawings during
review do not relieve the CONTRACTOR from compliance with Contract Drawings
and Specifications. Review is for conformance to the design concept and general
compliance with the Contract Documents only. The CONTRACTOR is responsible
for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions, fabrication processes
and techniques, coordinating WORK with the trades, and satisfactory and safe
performance of the WORK.
1.04 SAMPLES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the number of samples indicated by the
Specifications. If the number is not indicated, submit not less than three samples.
Where the amount of each sample is not indicated, submit such amount as
necessary for proper examination and testing by the methods indicated.
B. Samples shall be individually and indelibly labeled or tagged, indicating the salient
physical characteristics and manufacturer's name. Upon acceptance by the
ARCHITECT, one set of the samples will be stamped and dated by the
ARCHITECT and returned to the CONTRACTOR, one set of samples will be
retained by the ARCHITECT, and one set shall remain at the Site in the
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE's field office until completion of the WORK.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, the ARCHITECT will select colors and textures from
the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or
equipment lines. If certain samples represent nonstandard colors, materials,
products, or equipment lines that will require an increase in Contract Times or
Price, the CONTRACTOR shall clearly state so on the transmittal page of the
submittal.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule sample submittals such that:
1. Sample submittals for color and texture selection are complete so the
ARCHITECT has 45 days to assemble color panels and select color and
texture dependent products and materials without delay to the construction
schedule.
2. After the ARCHITECT selects colors and textures, the CONTRACTOR has
sufficient time to provide the products or materials without delay to the
construction schedule. The Contract Times will not be extended for the
CONTRACTOR's failure to allow enough review and approval or selection
August 15, 2014 01330-4 Project 6482
time, failure to submit complete samples requiring color or texture selection,
or failure to submit complete or approvable samples.
1.05 TECHNICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit technical maintenance information as required
by individual specifications in an organized manner as specified in the Technical
Specifications of the Contract Documents. Maintenance information, instructions
and data shall be provided for each maintainable material and piece of equipment.
It shall be written so that it can be used and understood by the OWNER's
operation and maintenance staff.
B. Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise, technical maintenance information
shall be submitted in initial draft form to the ARCHITECT not later than 30 days
prior to any startup, system testing or operator training. Subsequent drafts shall
be provided by the CONTRACTOR within 30 days from the date of
CONTRACTOR's receipt of review comments from the ARCHITECT. The
approved Maintenance Manual must be available prior to any startup, system
testing, or operator training. The CONTRACTOR's attention is drawn to Section
01770, CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, where the submission of the Maintenance
Manual is related to progress payments.
1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain one set of Drawings at the Site for the
preparation of record drawings. On these, it shall mark every project condition,
location, configuration, and any other change or deviation which may differ from
the Contract Drawings at the time of award, including buried or concealed
construction and utility features that are revealed during the course of
construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the horizontal and
vertical location of buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated, or that
were not indicated on the Contract Drawings. Said record drawings shall be
supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or as CONTRACTOR is
directed, to fully indicate the WORK as actually constructed. These record
drawings are the CONTRACTOR's representation of as-built conditions, and shall
be maintained up-to-date during the progress of the WORK. Using erasable
colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil), indicate in green when showing
information deleted from the Drawings, red when showing information added to
the Drawings, and blue and circled in blue to show notes. Notes shall identify
relevant Change Orders by number and date. Preparation of record drawings
shall conform to the following:
1. Date entries.
2. Call attention to entry by "cloud" drawn around area or areas affected.
3. Legibly mark to record actual changes made during construction, including,
but not limited to:
a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished first floor
data if not shown or where depth differs from that shown.
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of existing new Underground Facilities
and appurtenances, and other underground structures, equipment, or
WORK. Reference to at least two measurements to permanent surface
improvements.
August 15, 2014 01330-5 Project 6482
c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
d. Locate existing facilities, piping, equipment, and items critical to the
interface between physical conditions or construction and new
construction.
e. Changes made by Addenda and Field Orders, Work Change Directives,
Change Orders, Written Amendments, and ARCHITECT's written
interpretations and clarifications using consistent symbols for each and
showing appropriate document tracking number.
4. Dimensions of Schematic Layouts: Show record drawings, by dimension, the
centerline of each run of items such as are described in previous
subparagraph above.
a. Clearly identify the item by accurate notation such as "cast iron drain,"
"galv. water," and the like.
b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item ("under slab," "in
ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like.
c. Make identification so descriptive that it may be related reliably to
Specifications.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain one set of Specifications at the Site for the
preparation of record specifications. On these shall be recorded every change or
deviation during the course of the project resulting from Work Change Directives,
Field Orders, Substitutions, Requests for Information or Clarification (RFIs) or and
other reason. Record specifications shall be marked with green, red and blue
pencils in the same manner as record drawings, noting the document or other
reason that caused the change.
C. Prior to submitting each Application for Payment, request ARCHITECT's review
and approval of current status of record documents. Failure to properly maintain,
update, and submit record documents may result in a deferral by ARCHITECT to
recommend whole or any part of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment, either
partial or final.
D. In the case of those drawings that depict the detail requirement for equipment to
be assembled and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and the like,
the record drawings shall be updated by indicating those portions which are
superseded by change order drawings or final Shop Drawings, and by including
appropriate reference information describing the change orders by number and
the Shop Drawings by manufacturer, drawing, and revision numbers.
E. Disorganized or incomplete record documents will not be accepted. The
CONTRACTOR shall revise them and resubmit within 10 days.
F. Current as-built markups of record documents shall be accessible to the
ARCHITECT during the construction period and shall be provided to the
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE prior to requesting final payment. Current
markups of electrical and instrumentation drawings shall be accessible to
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE during startup and until final record drawings are
available.
August 15, 2014 01330-6 Project 6482
G. The request for final payment will not be accepted until the record documents
have been completed and delivered to the ARCHITECT.
H. Information submitted by the CONTRACTOR will be assumed to be correct, and
the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of such information.
1.07 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) SUBMITTALS
A. Quality control submittals are defined as those required by the Specifications to
present documentary evidence to the ARCHITECT that the CONTRACTOR has
satisfied certain requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, QC submittals shall be submitted:
1. Before delivery and unloading, for the following types of submittals:
a. Manufacturers' installation instructions.
b. Manufacturers' and Installers' experience qualifications.
c. Ready mix concrete delivery tickets.
d. Design calculations.
e. Affidavits and manufacturers' certification of compliance with indicated
product requirements.
f. Laboratory analysis results.
g. Factory test reports.
2. For the following types of submittals, the manufacturer's field representative
shall submit a draft certification prior to leaving the Project site and a final
certification within 7 days of the event documented:
a. Manufacturers'field representative certification of proper installation.
3. Within 30 days of the event documented for the following types of submittals:
a. Field measurement.
b. Field test reports.
c. Receipt of permit.
d. Receipt of regulatory approval.
C. The ARCHITECT will record the date that a QC submittal was received and
review it for compliance with submittal requirements, but the review procedures
above for Shop Drawings and samples will not apply.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
August 15, 2014 01330-7 Project 6482
SECTION 01400
CLEANING UP
01400-01 GENERAL
A. Cleaning During Construction: The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises
free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operation at the
completion of each day's work. All tools, construction equipment, machinery and
surplus material shall be removed and the work left "broom clean" or it's equivalent,
except as otherwise specified.
B. Cleaning at Substantial Completion: After all trades have completed work and just
before occupancy, the contractor shall vacuum clean interior of the building, including
heating and ventilation ducts, hand dust and clean fixtures and cabinets, clean finished
floors, hardware and doors and wash glazing and mirrors.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01400-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01450
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITION
A. Specific quality control requirements for the WORK are indicated throughout the
Contract Documents. The requirements of this Section are primarily related to
performance of the WORK beyond furnishing of manufactured products. The
term "Quality Control" includes inspection, sampling and testing, and associated
requirements.
B. The requirements of this section are in addition to those included as part of the
Quality Assurance Plan on the Drawings and Section 01455, SPECIAL TESTS
AND INSPECTIONS.
1.02 INSPECTION AT PLACE OF MANUFACTURE
A. The presence of the ARCHITECT at the place of manufacturer, however, shall
not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for providing products,
materials, and equipment which comply with all requirements of the Contract
Documents. Compliance is a duty of the CONTRACTOR, and said duty shall not
be avoided by any act or omission on the part of the ARCHITECT.
B. The ARCHITECT and OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, their assistants,
inspectors, consultants and other employees of the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE, shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the
WORK and the premises used by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors and
Suppliers, and the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors and Suppliers shall provide
safe and proper facilities therefore. Furthermore, the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE and the ARCHITECT shall, at all times, have immediate
access to all places of manufacture where machinery, equipment or materials
are being manufactured, produced or fabricated for use under the Contract
Documents, and shall have full facilities for determining that all such machinery,
equipment or materials are being made strictly in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.03 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all sampling and testing will be in accordance with
the methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, as applicable to
the class and nature of the article or materials considered; however, the
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE reserves the right to use any generally-
accepted system of sampling and testing which, in the opinion of the
ARCHITECT will assure the OWNER that the quality of the workmanship is in
full accord with the Contract Documents.
B. Any waiver by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE of any specific testing or
other quality assurance measures, whether or not such waiver is accompanied
August 2014 01450-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the testing or other
quality assurance requirements originally indicated, and whether or not such
guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any
necessary corrective or remedial WORK, shall not be construed as a waiver of
any requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the ARCHITECT reserves the
right to make independent investigations and tests, and failure of any portion of
the WORK to meet any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be
reasonable cause for the ARCHITECT to require the removal or correction and
reconstruction of any such WORK in accordance with the General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Inspection: The CONTRACTOR shall inspect materials or equipment upon the
arrival on the jobsite and immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged
and defective items.
B. Measurements: The CONTRACTOR shall verify measurements and dimensions
of the WORK, as an integral step of starting each installation.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products,
the CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and
recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or
more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01450-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01455
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS
A. This Specification section is intended to inform the CONTRACTOR of the extent
of the CONTRACTOR's responsibilities.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS/OBSERVATIONS
A. Required inspections and tests are described in the individual Specification
Sections for the items to be inspected or tested.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Approved Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly engaged in
conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, when such agency has been
approved by the Building Official.
B. Approved Fabricator: An established and qualified person, firm, or corporation
approved by the Building Official. Approval is based on written procedural and
quality control manuals and periodic auditing of fabrication practices by an
approved special inspection agency in accordance with IBC 2006 Section
1704.2.2.
C. Building Official: Local department or representatives responsible for enforcing
local codes and reviewing construction documents and issuing permits for the
erection, alteration, demolition, and moving of buildings and structures.
D. Continuous Special Inspection: The full-time observation of WORK by an
approved special inspector who is present in the area where the WORK is being
performed.
E. Fabricated Item: Structural, load bearing or lateral load-resisting assemblies
consisting of materials assembled prior to installation in a building or structure, or
subjected to operations such as heat treatment, thermal cutting, cold working or
reforming after manufacture and prior to installation in the building or structure.
Materials produced in accordance with standard specifications referenced in the
Contract Documents or the local governing codes, such as rolled structural steel
shapes, steel reinforcing bars, masonry units and plywood sheets, shall not be
considered "fabricated items".
F. Mechanical Component Supports: The structural members or assemblies which
transmit loads and forces from mechanical equipment to the structure.
G. Periodic Special Inspection: The part-time or intermittent observation of WORK
by an approved special inspector who is present in the area where the WORK
has been or is being performed and at the completion of the WORK.
August 2014 01455-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
H. Seismic Force-Resisting System: That part of the structural system that has been
considered in the design to provide the required resistance to seismic forces.
I. Shear Wall: A wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of the
wall.
J. Special Inspection: Inspection as herein required of the materials, installation,
fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring
special expertise to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and
referenced standards.
K. Special Inspection, Continuous: The full-time observation of work requiring
special inspection by an approved special inspector.
L. Special Inspection, Periodic: The part-time or intermittent observation of work
requiring inspection by an approved special inspector.
M. Special Inspector: An agency regularly engaged in conducting tests and
furnishing inspection services. The special inspector is an authorized
representative of the OWNER who provides inspections during construction. The
Special Inspector shall be approved/registered by the local Building Official.
N. Structural Observer: Registered design professional and authorized
representative of the OWNER, who provides structural observation services
during construction.
O. Structural Observation: Visual observation by a structural observer of the
structural system for general conformance to the Contract Documents at
significant construction stages and at completion of the structural system.
Structural observation does not include or waive the responsibility for the
inspections required by the Contract Documents.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors, whose work will be inspected or tested,
shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of
interest with the Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory.
B. When fabrication of assemblies that would otherwise require special inspection is
done on an approved fabricators premises, the following shall be submitted:
1. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit to the,
CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT and the building official a certificate of
compliance stating that the WORK was performed in accordance with the
approved construction documents.
C. CONTRACTOR'S Statement of Responsibility: The CONTRACTOR shall submit
to the Building Official and to the ARCHITECT a written CONTRACTOR's
Statement of Responsibility prior to the commencement of work on any system or
component requiring a Quality Assurance Plan for Seismic Resistance. The
CONTRACTOR's Statement of Responsibility shall contain the following:
1. Acknowledgment of awareness of the special requirements contained in the
Quality Assurance Plan for Seismic Resistance.
August 2014 01455-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2. Acknowledgment that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with
the construction documents approved by the Building Official.
3. Procedures for exercising control within the CONTRACTOR's organization,
the method and frequency of reporting, and the distribution of reports.
4. Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and
their position(s) in the organization.
1.05 PAYMENT
A. The OWNER shall engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector,
Agents of the Special Inspector, Testing Laboratory, and Structural Observer.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or
reinspection of work that fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Prior to the commencement of the WORK the CONTRACTOR will be advised of
the name of the testing laboratory, and the firms to be obtained to perform the
special inspections, and structural observations.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the Special Inspector, his agents, and
the Structural Observer, so that the special inspections, observation, and testing
may be performed without hindrance.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall review the individual specification sections and shall
be responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections, observations, and
tests. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the Special Inspector, Testing Laboratory,
or Structural Observer at least 48 hours in advance of a required inspection,
observation, or test.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule inspections and observations accounting for
the potential need for modifications to be made to the WORK.
E. Failure by the CONTRACTOR to meet observation, inspection, or testing
schedules may require removal of any subsequent work for observation,
inspection and testing. Removal and replacement of any finished work and/or
framing damaged by the removal process or as required for corrective action
shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Uninspected WORK that required
inspection may be rejected solely on that basis.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access
to the WORK to be inspected, observed, or tested, to obtain and handle samples
August 2014 01455-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests, observations,
inspections, storage, and curing of test samples.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall keep at the project site the latest set of construction
drawings, field sketches, change orders, approved shop drawings, and
specifications for use by the Special Inspector and Structural Observer.
H. The Special Inspection and observation program shall in no way relieve the
CONTRACTOR of its obligation to perform WORK in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective
Quality Control program. The CONTRACTOR's quality control personnel shall
first review all work that is to be subjected to Special Inspections or Structural
Observation.
I. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for construction site safety.
J. Prior to the beginning of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall have a
preconstruction meeting with the ARCHITECT, Building Official, CONTRACTOR,
OWNER, Special Inspector, Structural Observer, and Testing Laboratories, to
review the special inspection and structural observation requirements.
3.02 INSPECTION OF FABRICATIONS
A. When WORK is done on the premises of an approved fabricator, special
inspection is not required.
3.03 RECORDS AND REPORTS
A. The Special Inspector shall prepare detailed daily reports of each special
inspection or test.
B. The Structural Observer shall prepare detailed reports of each structural
observation.
C. Any discrepancies from the Contract Documents found during a special
inspection or structural observation shall be immediately reported to the
CONTRACTOR. If the discrepancies are not corrected the Special Inspector or
Observer shall notify the ARCHITECT and Building Official. Reports shall
document all discrepancies identified and the corrective action taken.
D. Final Reports of Special Inspections and Structural Observations:
1. The "Final Report of Special Inspections" shall be completed by the Special
Inspector and submitted to the ARCHITECT and Building Official prior to the
issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy.
2. The "Final Report of Special Inspections" will certify that all required
inspections have been performed and will itemize any discrepancies that
were not corrected or resolved.
3. The "Final Structural Observation Report"will certify that site visits have
been made and identify any reported deficiencies, which, to the best of the
Structural Observer's knowledge, have not been resolved.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01455-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
FORM CWM-7: CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORT
Quantity Of Waste Salvaged Quantity Of Waste Recycled
Total Quantity Total Quantity
Total Quantity Of Waste
Generation Estimated Actual Tons Estimated Actual TONS Of Waste
Material Category Recovered
Point Of Waste Tons Tons(Tonnes) (Tonnes)(B) Tons(Tonnes) (TONNES)(C) Recovered %
(Tonnes)(A) Tons(Tonnes) (D/A X 100)
(D=B+C)
Packaging:Cardboard
Packaging:Boxes
Packaging:Plastic Sheet or Film
Packaging:Polystyrene
Packaging:Pallets or Skids
Packaging:Crates
Packaging:Paint Cans
Packaging:Plastic Pails
Site-Clearing Waste
Masonry or CMU
Lumber:Cut-Offs
Lumber:Warped Pieces
Plywood or OSB(scraps)
Wood Forms
Wood Waste Chutes
Wood Trim(cut-offs)
Metals
Insulation
Roofing
Joint Sealant Tubes
Gypsum Board(scraps)
Carpet and Pad(scraps)
Piping
Electrical Conduit
Other:
FORM CWM-8:DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORT
Quantity Of Waste Salvaged Quantity Of Waste Recycled
Total Quantity Total Quantity
Total Quantity Of Waste
Generation Estimated Actual Tons Estimated Actual Tons Of Waste
Material Category Of Waste Tons Recovered
Point Tons(Tonnes) (Tonnes)(B) Tons(Tonnes) (Tonnes)(C) Recovered%
(Tonnes)(A) Tons(Tonnes)
(D/AX 100)
(D=B+C)
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Concrete
Brick
CMU _
Lumber
Plywood and OSB
Wood Paneling
Wood Trim _
Miscellaneous Metals
Structural Steel
Rough Hardware
isulation
Roofing
Doors and Frames _
Door Hardware
Windows _
Glazing
Acoustical Tile
Carpet
Carpet Pad
Demountable Partitions
Equipment
Cabinets
Plumbing Fixtures
Piping
Supports and Hangers
Valves
Sprinklers
Mechanical Equipment
Electrical Conduit
Copper Wiring
Light Fixtures
Lamps
Lighting Ballasts
Electrical Devices
Switchgear and Panelboards
Transformers
Other:
SECTION 01524
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction
waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition
or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse
in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice
to Proceed.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
August2014 01524-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,
submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for
demolition waste. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes).
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes).
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of
total waste.
B. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of
recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them.
Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and
requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction
work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and
construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of
measure throughout waste management plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,
storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste
management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with drawings for staging locations of temporary waste management
facilities.
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
August2014 01524-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of
submittal return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and
disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent
occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating
materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Comply with drawings for staging locations of temporary waste
management facilities.
3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only;
available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Rubbish Works of Portland, 29785 NW West Union Road, #A037, North Plains,
OR 97133, (503) 349-1190.
C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to
recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives,
solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process.
E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable
materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials if found.
2. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling
receiver or processor.
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
August2014 01524-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
A. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
B. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a
dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of
fasteners.
C. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and
tack strips.
1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by
Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.
3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,
remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or
incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be
disposed of accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 ATTACHMENTS
A. Form CWM-7 for construction waste
B. Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.
END OF SECTION 01524
August 2014 01524-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01560
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING (NOT USED)
1.02 DUST ABATEMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall prevent its operation from producing dust in amounts
causing a nuisance to persons living in or occupying buildings in the vicinity onsite.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide its own source of water or other materials for
dust abatement. The CONTRACTOR shall not use waste oil or other similar
materials that may cause damage to the environment for dust abatement. The
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage resulting from dust originating
from its operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued until the
CONTRACTOR is relieved of further responsibility by the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE.
1.03 RUBBISH CONTROL
A. During the progress of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and
other areas used by it in a neat and clean condition, and free from any
accumulation of rubbish. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of all rubbish and
waste materials of any nature occurring at the Site, and shall establish and
maintain weekly intervals of collection and disposal of such materials and waste.
The CONTRACTOR shall also keep plant roads free from dirt, rubbish, and
unnecessary obstructions resulting from its operations. Disposal of all rubbish and
surplus materials shall be off the Site in accordance with local codes and
ordinances governing locations and methods of disposal, and in conformance with
all applicable safety laws, and to the particular requirements of Part 1926 of the
OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. CONTRACTOR shall not use
OWNER's dumpsters or other rubbish containers.
B. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall also conform to the requirements
of and Section 01524, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01560-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01732
CONCRETE MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSIONS AND PH TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cutting and patching existing and new construction.
B. Concrete Moisture Vapor Emissions and PH Testing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
B. Cutting and Patching Plan:
1. Submit details of proposed construction before cutting and patching
construction commences affecting:
a. Work of OWNER or of others.
b. Structural integrity of element of Project.
2. Cutting and Patching Plan shall include the following:
a. Identification of Work.
b. Description of affected construction.
c. Necessity for cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
d. Description of proposed construction.
e. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Comply with specifications and standards for products involved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure structural integrity of
affected portion of Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and
persons from injury.
C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of Project, which may be exposed
by cutting and patching, and maintain excavations free from water.
August 2014 01732-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, Fit, and Patch when required to:
1. Make several parts fit together properly.
2. Remove and replace construction not conforming to Contract Documents.
3. Remove samples of installed construction as specified for testing.
4. Provide routine penetrations of structural surfaces for installation of piping and
electrical conduit.
B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage and will
provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
C. Openings in Existing Concrete:
1. Create openings by:
a. Saw cutting completely through concrete, or
b. Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1-inch depth on both
surfaces (when accessible) and removing concrete by chipping.
2. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond limits of opening.
3. Make corners square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or
chipping.
4. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks or channels in service or from
damaging existing equipment and other facilities.
D. Sizing of Openings in Existing Concrete:
1. Make openings sufficiently large to permit final alignment of pipe and fittings
without deflections.
2. Allow adequate space for packing around pipes and conduit to ensure water
tightness.
E. Grouting Pipes in Place:
1. Sandblast concrete surfaces and thoroughly clean sand and other foreign
material from surfaces prior to placing grout.
2. Grout pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits in place by pouring grout under a
head of at least 4 inches. Vibrate grout into place. Completely fill the spaces
occupied by pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits.
3. Water cure the grout.
F. Connections to Existing Pipes:
1. Cut existing pipe square.
2. Properly prepare the ends for the connection indicated on the Drawings.
3. Repair any damage to existing lining and coating.
August 2014 01732-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
G. Rehabilitate all areas affected by removal of existing equipment, equipment pads
and bases, piping, supports, electrical panels, electric devices, and conduits such
that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains.
1. Fill areas in existing floors, walls, and ceilings from removed piping, conduit
and fasteners with non-shrink grout and finish smooth.
2. Remove concrete bases for equipment and supports by:
a. Saw cutting clean, straight lines with a depth equal to the concrete cover
over reinforcement minus 1/2 inch below finished surface. Do not cut
existing reinforcement on floors.
b. Chip concrete within scored lines and cut exposed reinforcing steel and
anchor bolts.
c. Patch with non-shrink grout to match adjacent grade and finish.
3. Terminate abandoned piping and conduits with blind flanges, caps, or plugs.
H. Treat Existing Concrete Reinforcement as follows:
1. Where existing reinforcement is to remain, protect, clean, and extend into new
concrete.
2. Where existing reinforcement is not to be retained, cut off as follows:
a. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, cut
reinforcement flush with concrete surface at the removal line.
b. Where concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, cut
reinforcement 2 inches below the surface, paint ends with epoxy, and
patch holes with dry pack mortar.
3.03 CONCRETE MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION & pH TESTING
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide concrete moisture vapor emission and pH testing to all concrete
specified to be covered with floor coverings or special coatings. Includes
concrete placed below, on and above grade.
2. Testing to be scheduled no less than 1 nor more than 3 weeks prior to scheduled
flooring installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09651 - Resilient Floor Tile
C. References
1. ASTM F-1869-04—Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
2. ASTM F-710-03—Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other
Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
D. Submittals
August 2014 01732-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Report all test results in chart form listing test dates, start/stop time, start/stop
weight, weight gain in grams, moisture vapor emission value and pH levels.
2. List test locations on chart and show same on 8 1/2 x 11 site map (when such
map is made available to testing agency)
3. Deliver results in duplicate for distribution to Architect and General Contractor.
E. Quality Assurance
1. Independent Testing Agency.
a. Certified by Test Kit Manufacturer for product use.
b. Other agency with verifiable experience.
c. Owner will pay costs associated with testing. Contractor will
coordinate with testing agency.
2. Commercially Produced Moisture Vapor Emission Test Kits:
a. Test dish including calcium chloride must be commercially packaged and
delivered to test site in sealed factory wrapping.
b. Test dome from same source as dish.
c. Test kit must comply with ASTM standards of size and weight.
3. Wide range pH paper, and distilled or de-ionized water.
3.4 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Calcium Chloride Test as Manufactured by Vaprecision (800)449-6194, or
equal.
2. pH test paper as manufactured by Micro Essential Laboratory, or equal.
3.05 EXECUTION
A. Quantification of Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission.
1. The test site should be maintained at the same temperature and humidity
conditions as those anticipated during normal occupancy. These temperature
and humidity levels should be maintained for 48 hours prior and during test
period. If meeting this criteria is not possible, then minimum conditions should be
75± 10°F and 50± 10% relative humidity. When a building is not under HVAC
control, a recording hygrometer or data logger shall be in place recording
conditions during the test period. A transcript of this information must be included
with the test report.
August 2014 01732-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
2. The number of vapor emission test sites is determined by the square footage of
the facility. The minimum number of tests to be placed is equal to 3 in the first
1,000 sq.ft. and 1 per each additional 1,000 square feet.
3. Tests sites are to be cleaned of all adhesive residue, curing compounds, paints,
sealers, floor coverings, etc. 24 hours prior to the placement of test kits.
4. Weigh test dish on site prior to start of test. Scale must report weight to 0.1
grams. Record weight and start time.
5. Expose Calcium Chloride and set dish on concrete surface.
6. Install test containment dome and allow test to proceed for 60— 72 hours.
7. Retrieve test dish by carefully cutting through containment dome. Close and
reseal test dish.
8. Weigh test dish on site recording weight and stop time.
9. Calculate and report results as "pounds of emission per 1,000 sq.ft. per 24 hours"
B. Quantifying pH level.
1. At each vapor emission test site, after removal of test containment dome,
perform pH test.
a. Place several drops of water onto the concrete surface to form a puddle
approximately 1" in diameter.
b. Allow the water to set for approximately 60 seconds.
c. Dip the pH paper into the water and remove immediately, compare color
to chart provided by paper supplier to determine pH reading.
2. Record and report results.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01732-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 FINAL WALK THROUGH INSPECTION
A. When the CONTRACTOR has informed the ARCHITECT that the WORK has
been completed, the CONTRACTOR shall participate in a final walkthrough
inspection with the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and ARCHITECT at which
time the final punchlist will be prepared. The punchlist shall include all previously
noted preliminary punchlist items and/or non-compliance or uncompleted work
items. The CONTRACTOR shall complete and sign off all punchlist items with
the ARCHITECT.
1.02 FINAL CLEANUP
A. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed
WORK, all rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment,
and temporary structures and facilities used during construction. Clean dust and
debris from all new equipment, control cabinets, and electrical enclosures and
components.
B. Final acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will be
withheld until the CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily performed the final cleanup of
the Site.
1.03 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance
periods, and on-site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such
dates shall be established not less than 10 days prior to beginning any of the
foregoing items, to allow the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, the ARCHITECT,
and their authorized representatives sufficient time to schedule attendance at
such activities.
1.04 MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL
A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that 1 percent of the
Contract Price will be retained from any monies due the CONTRACTOR as
progress payments, if 8 weeks prior to the scheduled energization start-up and/or
commissioning of any piece of equipment, the approved Maintenance Manuals
complying with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, has not been
submitted for that piece of equipment. The aforementioned amount will be
retained by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE as the agreed, estimated value of
the approved Maintenance Manuals. Any such retention of money for failure to
submit the approved Maintenance Manuals in the specified timeframe shall be in
addition to the retention of any payments due to the CONTRACTOR under
Article 14 of the General Conditions. In any event, the approved Maintenance
August 2014 01770-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
Manuals must be available to the Engineer prior to any equipment start up and
system testing.
1.05 FINAL SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR, prior to requesting final payment, shall obtain and submit
the following items to the ARCHITECT for transmittal to the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE:
1. Written guarantees, where required.
2. Maintenance Manuals and instructions.
3. Maintenance stock items; spare parts; special tools.
4. Completed record documents (Drawings and Specifications).
5. Color copies of all field as-builts.
6. Preconstruction, construction and post construction videos and photos.
7. Bonds for roofing, maintenance, etc., as required.
8. Certificates of inspection and acceptance by local governing agencies
having jurisdiction.
9. Correction period bonds.
10. Releases from all parties (including private property owner's whose
properties were used for yard or staging areas or were damaged)who are
entitled to claims against the subject project, property, or improvement
pursuant to the provisions of law.
1.06 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Prior to the acceptance of the WORK and final payment, the OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE will require the CONTRACTOR to submit a certificate in
form substantially as follows:
1. "I (We) hereby certify that all WORK has been performed and materials
supplied in accordance with the Contract Documents for the above WORK,
and that:
a. Not less than the prevailing rates of wages has been paid to laborers,
workers and mechanics employed on this WORK;
b. All claims for material and labor and other services performed in
connection with these Specifications have been paid;
c. All monies due the State Industrial Accident Fund, the State
Unemployment Compensation Trust Fund (ORS 279.510), the State
Tax Commission (ORS 315.575, 316.711 and 316.714), hospital
associations and/or others, (ORS 279.320), have been paid;
d. All permit final inspections and approvals are complete;
e. CONTRACTOR releases and discharges Clean Water Services of and
from all liabilities, claims, obligations and actions arising under the
Contract; and
f. CONTRACTOR and the surety for this Contract shall defend, indemnify
and save Clean Water Services harmless from any liability or expense
because of any claim on any Bond or any other claim related to the
Contract or the WORK."
1.07 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the defective WORK correction
requirements contained in Article 13 of the General Conditions.
August 2014 01770-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
B. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish
elevations, shall be considered as a part of such required corrective work, and
any repair or resurfacing constructed by the CONTRACTOR which becomes
necessary by reason of such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part of
such required corrective work unless the CONTRACTOR shall have obtained a
statement in writing from the affected private owner or public agency releasing
the OWNER from further responsibility in connection with such repair or
resurfacing.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon
receipt of written order from the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. If the
CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or replacements promptly, the
OWNER reserves the right to do the WORK and the CONTRACTOR and its
surety shall be liable to the OWNER for the cost thereof.
D. The ARCHITECT will establish a Need for Warranty Service system with the
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE whereby the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will
alert the CONTRACTOR of the need for warranty service during the one year
Correction Period. The CONTRACTOR shall respond promptly to these requests.
Should the CONTRACTOR fail to respond promptly, the OWNER reserves the
right to have the work performed by others and to back-charge the
CONTRACTOR.
1.08 BOND
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide maintenance assurance to guarantee
performance of the provisions contained in Article CORRECTION OF
DEFECTIVE WORK above, and Article 13 of the General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 01770-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof deck where skylight has been demolished.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05400 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, delegated-design
framing of openings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating
that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,
pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
August2014 05310-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with
requirements:
1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3,
"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its
"Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm
ratings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation
to maintain insulation free of moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck
according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply
with requirements indicated.
August 2014 05310-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or
pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-
steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness,
of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
F. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and
commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection
limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for
strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
August 2014 05310-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding
work.
I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate
mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two
welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches (305 mm) apart in
the field of roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter,
based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of
panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18
inches (457 mm) and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger,
carbon-steel screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of
1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written
instructions. Mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where
indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure complete closure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
August 2014 05310-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05310
August2014 05310-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 05400
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof rafter framing where skylight has been demolished.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05310 "Steel Deck" for roof deck infill where skylight has been
demolished.
2. Section 09111 "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for interior non-load-bearing,
metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical
fasteners.
2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,
bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to
adjoining work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.
D. Periodic Inspection: Schedule for code required periodic inspection for cold-formed
steel framing and welding activities.
August 2014 05400-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
B. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive
Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and
other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
2. Craco Mfg., Inc.
3. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.
4. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
5. Steeler, Inc.
6. United Metal Products, Inc.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01400 "Quality Requirements,"to design cold-formed steel framing.
B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: Per Delegated-Design.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand without deflections
greater than the following:
a. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/120 of the horizontally
projected span for live loads.
August 2014 05400-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of
grade and coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.
B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G90 (Z275).
2.4 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING
A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths
indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm).
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.
3. Section Properties: As required.
2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M,
Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for
framing members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless
otherwise indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. End clips.
4. Gusset plates.
August2014 05400-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
5. Stud kickers and knee braces.
6. Joist hangers and end closures.
7. Backer plates.
2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according
to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, and
carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-
tapping, steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard
elsewhere.
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-
formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,
and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications
and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire
tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with
screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw
threads.
August 2014 05400-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting,
pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and
erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent
distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm)from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening
requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum
out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom
track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch
(6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry
construction.
B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be
field assembled.
B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
August 2014 05400-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce
flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position
between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and
complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw
penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated
for track or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads
comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces
and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has
been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently
frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings,
that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
approved or standard punched openings.
J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to
a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening
requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated
and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
August 2014 05400-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05400
August 2014 05400-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Wood furring.
3. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06412 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets" for nonstructural
carpentry items and not specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less
than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified
independent testing agency.
August2014 06105-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both
before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a
qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each
type of treatment.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the
classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,
securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-
writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the
rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are
minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)
thickness or less unless otherwise indicated.
August 2014 06105-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying
with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a
flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no
evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional
20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond
the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use
where exterior type is not indicated.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or
back of each piece.
E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect
finishes.
F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed blocking.
2. Plywood backing panels.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any
species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and
any of the following species and grades:
1. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
August2014 06105-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade
lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate
defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut
lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other
work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no
knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated
or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc
coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 length as recommended by
screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood
Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
August 2014 06105-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening
edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation
or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that
interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum
number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
G. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise
indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes
indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size (19-by-38-mm
actual-size)furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection,
miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06105
August 2014 06105-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 06412
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets, backsplash and countertops.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-
faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before
cabinet installation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and
hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other
construction before cabinet installation.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure
decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and
accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products,
documentation indicating that products contain no urea formaldehyde.
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-
scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
August 2014 06412-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets
and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.
4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Plastic laminates.
2. PVC edge material.
3. Thermoset decorative panels.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
1. Composite wood and agrifiber products.
2. Thermoset decorative panels.
3. High-pressure decorative laminate.
4. Adhesives.
C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification
Program certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in
other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions
comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
August2014 06412-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature
between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70
percent during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by
field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction,
establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for
trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be
supported and installed as indicated.
B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in
Section 08712 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural
woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural
Woodwork Standards"for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for
construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality
standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.
Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality
standard.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
August 2014 06412-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Abet Laminati, Inc.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Edges: Grade HGS.
5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate,
NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm)
thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces,
provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers unless located directly under tops.
I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure
decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting
screws from interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by
mechanical fasteners.
K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors
and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.
2. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following
categories: See A300 Room Finish Legend.
August2014 06412-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with
requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality
grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard
finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and
complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3,
3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with
architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08712 "Door Hardware."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees
of opening, self-closing.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal on all drawers and drawers, BMHA A156.9,
B02011.
D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests,
B04081.
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of
drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers. Minimum 75
lbs. rating.
H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for
steel base.
J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with
product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
August 2014 06412-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed
anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside
face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for
faces.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide
ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork
fabrication will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely
assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening
devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as
intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements
before disassembling for shipment.
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges
of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete
work as required.
August2014 06412-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
mm).
D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing
nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork.
1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to
provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory
items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag,
bow, or other variation from a straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more
than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and
visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 06412
August 2014 06412-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation for sound attenuation in and over interior partitions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07543 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing for insulation specified
as part of roofing construction.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
August 2014 07210-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Johns Manville.
3. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and
sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between
insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders
and no formaldehyde.
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit
less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
2.2 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle;
capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with
self-locking washer in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
b. Gemco; Spindle Type.
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by
2 inches (50 mm) square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm)
in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
August 2014 07210-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support
of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures
not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438
mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by
taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install
blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation
48 inches (1219 mm) up either side of partitions.
END OF SECTION 07210
August 2014 07210-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
SECTION 07543
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
B. Section includes the installation of insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Insulation strips
are furnished under Section 05310 "Steel Deck."
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, and blocking; and for
wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section "Preparation for Re-Roofing" for re-cover board beneath new roofing.
3. Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint
preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
August 2014 07543-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with
requirements, including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside the
weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work, including:
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing,
fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing
system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article.
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
August2014 07543-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Global approved for
roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's special warranty.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting
during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid
permanent deflection of deck.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing
system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate board, and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end
of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all
components of roofing system such as roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products,
for the following warranty period:
August 2014 07543-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johns
Manville TPO Roofing Membrane, or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
2. Firestone Building Products.
3. Or approved equal.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners for roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by
membrane roofing manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of
exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested
according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and
adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as
demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply
with requirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a built-up roofing
system, and shall be listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
2. Hail-Resistance Rating: MH.
D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to
ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
E. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR
"Roof Products Qualified Product List"for low-slope roof products.
August 2014 07543-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
F. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of
not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to
CRRC-1.
G. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof
slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
H. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs
indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.3 TPO ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced,
uniform, flexible fabric-backed TPO sheet.
1. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color: White.
2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall
comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.
f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
g. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.
3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall
comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services')
"Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4
mm) thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.
August2014 07543-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or
aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm)thick; with anchors.
F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated
steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm
thick), prepunched.
G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap
sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum
substrate, thickness to match existing adjacent construction.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure
Sheathing.
d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate
board to roof deck.
2.6 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene film laminated to layer of butyl
rubber adhesive, minimum 30-mil- (0.76-mm-) total thickness; maximum permeance
rating of 0.1 perm (6 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); cold applied, with slip-resisting surface and
release paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer.
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
August 2014 07543-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing
manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or
glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
c. Dyplast Products.
d. Firestone Building Products.
e. GAF Materials Corporation.
f. Hunter Panels.
g. Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company.
h. Johns Manville.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches (1:48), or to match adjacent slopes of existing roof, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatibility with roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof
insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to
attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.
2. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.
3. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate,
thickness to match existing adjacent construction.
August 2014 07543-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure
Sheathing.
d. Temple-Inland, Inc; GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing.
e. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.
E. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric,
water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended
by roofing system manufacturer for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced,
and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck
at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Section 05310 "Steel Deck."
4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for
capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
6. Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing
components to roof deck have been removed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove
sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs
when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Install insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written
instructions.
August 2014 07543-8 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Complete terminations and base fleshings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or
when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on
adjoining roofing.
C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain
weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.
3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to
recommendations in FM Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention
Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at
corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer.
Install self-adhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and
end lapping each sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches (90 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm),
respectively. Seal laps by rolling.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to
prevent air movement into roofing system.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall
insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with
joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6
inches (150 mm) in each direction.
August 2014 07543-9 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers,
install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if
applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps
exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm)with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and
penetrations.
G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck
using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Global's
"RoofNav"for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and
field of roof.
3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt,
applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C)of equiviscous temperature.
4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
5. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread
insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches
(150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof
deck.
1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
I. Install slip sheet over insulation and immediately beneath roofing.
3.7 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
August 2014 07543-10 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice
area of roofing.
E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
F. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure
a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to
seal cut edges of sheet.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample
areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with
requirements.
H. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in
place with clamping ring.
3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate,
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air
weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate
through termination bars.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions,
surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage
components, and to furnish reports to Architect.
August 2014 07543-11 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1. Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM): Testing agency shall survey entire roof
area for potential leaks using electric field vector mapping (EFVM).
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel
to inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with
copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to
warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS of
, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed
roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>.
2. Address: <Insert address>.
3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>.
4. Address: <Insert address>.
5. Area of Work: <Insert information>.
6. Acceptance Date: .
7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>.
8. Expiration Date: .
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or
indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective
materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions
herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense,
make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are
August 2014 07543-12 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said
work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of
the building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 100 mph.
c. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement,
excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the
work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors,
maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or
unauthorized by Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be
null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until
cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible
party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but
is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting
from leaks or faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the
extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages
Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and
void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner
in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely
damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or
termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used
for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled
surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally
specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but
only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected
leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for
Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects,
or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said
work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and
resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this
Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for
August 2014 07543-13 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract
Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or
a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this
day of
1. Authorized Signature:
2. Name:
3. Title:
END OF SECTION 07543
August 2014 07543-14 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 07591
PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Partial tear-off of roof areas indicated.
2. Temporary roofing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01560 "Temporary Environmental Controls" for temporary construction
and environmental-protection measures for reroofing preparation.
2. Section 07543 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for roofing materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The
NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
B. Partial Roof Tear-Off: Removal of selected components and accessories from existing
roofing system.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details.
C. Temporary Roofing Submittal: Product data and description of temporary roofing
system. If temporary roof remains in place, include surface preparation requirements
needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing manufacturer,
stating acceptance of the temporary roof and that its inclusion does not adversely
affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind or its FM Global rating.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
August2014 07591-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1. Include certificate that Installer is approved by warrantor of existing roofing
system.
2. Include certificate that Installer is licensed to perform asbestos abatement.
B. Fastener pull-out test report.
C. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be
misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work
begins.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on
existing roofing.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, per 07543.
1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting
agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing
Installer, including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck,
roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and
replacement, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components
that are to remain.
c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and
roof-drain plugging and plug removal.
d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
e. Existing roof deck conditions requiring notification of Architect.
f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications.
g. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate
for reuse.
h. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing.
i. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that affect reroofing.
j. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes.
k. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection
systems.
August 2014 07591-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
I. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
m. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before
proceeding.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Existing Roofing System: TPO roofing.
B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct
reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than
72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations.
1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust
and water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down
HVAC and fire-alarm or-detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants
from below work area.
2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to
evacuate occupants from below affected area. Verify that occupants below work
area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over impaired deck area.
C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements,
exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.
D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding are maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
1. A roof moisture survey of existing roofing system is available for Contractor's
reference.
2. The results of an analysis of test cores from existing roofing system are available
for Contractor's reference.
3. Construction Drawings for existing roofing system are provided for Contractor's
convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. They
are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Contractor's own
investigations. Contractor is responsible for conclusions derived from existing
documents.
F. Limit construction loads on roof to 100 PSF for rooftop equipment wheel loads and 20
PSF for uniformly distributed loads.
G. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing
roofing system or building.
1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same
day.
August 2014 07591-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
H. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials, such as asbestos-
containing materials, will be encountered in the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
roofing system warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding.
1. Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of reroofing, and obtain
documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and
warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS
A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation: ASTM C 578.
B. Plywood: DOC PS1, Grade CD Exposure 1.
C. OSB: DOC PS2, Exposure 1.
2.2 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. Design and selection of materials for temporary roofing are Contractor's
responsibilities.
B. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).
C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated,
glass-fiber sheet.
D. Glass-Fiber Felts: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.
F. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV.
G. Base Sheet Fasteners: Capped head, factory-coated steel fasteners, listed in FM
Global's "Approval Guide."
2.3 INFILL AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
A. Use infill materials matching existing roofing system materials unless otherwise
indicated.
August 2014 07591-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Infill materials are specified in Section 07543 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO)
Roofing" unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel deck is specified in Section 05310 "Steel Deck."
C. Wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are specified in Section 06105 "Miscellaneous
Carpentry."
D. Plywood roof sheathing is specified in Section 06160 "Sheathing."
2.4 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing
system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing
and new roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work.
B. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately
notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions.
C. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed.
1. Loosely lay 1-inch- (25-mm-) minimum thick, expanded polystyrene (EPS)
insulation over existing roofing in areas indicated. Loosely lay 15/32-inch (12-
mm) plywood or OSB panels over EPS. Extend EPS past edges of plywood or
OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been
protected.
3. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has
been completed. Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing.
D. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work.
Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor
air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.
E. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate
rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
F. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each
workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use
roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end
of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
August 2014 07591-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system
removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage
method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into
or under existing roofing system components that are to remain.
3.2 DECK PREPARATION
A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.
B. If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to one another or to structure are
observed, or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify
Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.
C. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is
suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by
Architect.
D. Provide additional deck securement as indicated on Drawings.
E. Replace steel deck as indicated on Drawings and Section 05310 "Steel Deck."
F. Replace steel deck as directed by Section 05310"Steel Deck."
G. Replace roof sheathing as indicated on Drawings.
3.3 INFILL MATERIALS INSTALLATION
A. Immediately after roof tear-off, and inspection and repair, if needed, of deck, fill in tear-
off areas to match existing roofing system construction.
1. Installation of infill materials is specified in Section 07543 "Thermoplastic
Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing."
2. Installation of wood blocking, curbs, and nailers is specified in Section 06105
"Miscellaneous Carpentry."
B. Install new roofing patch over roof infill area. If new roofing is installed the same day
tear-off is made, roofing patch is not required.
3.4 TEMPORARY ROOFING
A. Install approved temporary roofing over area to be reroofed.
B. Install temporary roofing over area to be reroofed. Install two glass-fiber felts, lapping
each sheet 19 inches (483 mm) over preceding sheet. Embed glass-fiber felt in a solid
mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied within equiviscous temperature range. Glaze-
coat completed surface with hot roofing asphalt.
C. Remove temporary roofing before installing new roofing.
August 2014 07591-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
D. Prepare temporary roof to receive new roofing per Section 05310 "Steel Deck" and
Section 07543 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing." Restore temporary roofing to
watertight condition. Obtain approval for temporary roof substrate from roofing
manufacturer and Architect before installing new roof.
3.5 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION
A. Remove blisters and areas of roofing not fully adhered.
B. Remove substrate irregularities that inhibit new re-cover boards from conforming to
substrate.
1. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced built-up bituminous roofing
with a power broom.
2. Clean substrate of contaminants, such as dirt, debris, oil, and grease, that can
affect adhesion of coated foamed roofing.
3. Power vacuum the existing roof surface. If recommended by foam manufacturer,
prime dried surface at recommended rate with recommended primer.
4. Scarify surface of coated polyurethane roofing as necessary to achieve a suitable
substrate for new roofing.
5. Verify that surface is dry by pressing litmus paper to surface areas most likely to
retain moisture, such as shaded areas and low spots. If paper changes color,
surface is too wet to apply foam.
3.6 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL
A. Remove existing base flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt,
sheet materials, dirt, and debris.
B. Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain. Replace metal
counterflashings damaged during removal with counterflashings of same metal, weight
or thickness, and finish.
C. Inspect parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and
damage. If parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated,
immediately notify Architect.
D. Remove existing parapet sheathing and replace with new parapet sheathing to comply
with Section 06160 "Sheathing." If parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers
have deteriorated, immediately notify Architect.
E. When directed by Architect, replace parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers
to comply with Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry."
3.7 RE-COVER BOARD INSTALLATION
August2014 07591-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Install re-cover boards over roofing with long joints in continuous straight lines and end
joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt re-cover boards together and fasten to
deck.
1. Tape joints of re-cover boards if required by roofing manufacturer.
B. Fasten re-cover boards to resist wind-uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof specified in Section 07543 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing."
1. Install additional fasteners near board corners and edges as necessary to
conform boards to substrate and to adjacent boards.
3.8 DISPOSAL
A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished
materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.
B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 07591
August2014 07591-8 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Latex joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09250 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
2. Section 09512 "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters
with acoustical sealants.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied
Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A,
Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite
side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
August 2014 07920-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively.
Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint
substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is
obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not
evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of
noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application,joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint
preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing
specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
August 2014 07920-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been
removed from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to
repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable
to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and
joint substrates.
August 2014 07920-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is
deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining
to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come
in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.2 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
d. Or approved equal.
2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and
laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a
surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute
to producing optimum sealant performance.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
August 2014 07920-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant
manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
August 2014 07920-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated
per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as
indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at
both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure
from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered
satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to
August 2014 07920-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove
sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
and windows.
2. Joint Sealant: Latex.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
END OF SECTION 07920
August 2014 07920-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 08411
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for punched openings.
3. Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside the
weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans,
elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for
draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.
August2014 08411-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
b. Anchorage.
c. Glazing.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each
aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.
B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes
requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies.
Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-
framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
August 2014 08411-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied
finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01400 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and
storefronts.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as
determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing
those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of
supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column
shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and
concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer
North America, TriFab VG 450 or product by one of the following:
1. Arcadia, Inc.
2. EFCO Corporation.
August 2014 08411-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Nonthermal.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides, tempered.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: Clear anodic finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing
members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant
primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods
according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces
according to applicable SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing
operation.
1. Door Construction: 2-inch (50.8-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-
inch- (4.8-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members.
Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated
and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width; glaze remainder of door area.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
August 2014 08411-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated
in door and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this
Section.
1. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf(22.2 N)to fully open door.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance
Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware
designations as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are
listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance
Door Hardware Sets"Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these
standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into
a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
2. Quantities:
a. For doors up to 87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide three hinges per leaf.
D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
E. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key
control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
F. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door
location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
2.6 GLAZING
A. Glazing: As recommended by manufacturer, tempered at doors and side lites.
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of
black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
August 2014 08411-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out
from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match
framing system.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing
to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from hallway side.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting
stops.
E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using
temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.
G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door
operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on
head of frames for pairs of doors.
H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware
before applying finishes.
August2014 08411-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project
according to Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation
includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
D. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion.
Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
E. Install glazing per manufacturer's recommendations.
August 2014 08411-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact
points.
1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply
with the following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in
12.2 m).
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in
12.2 m).
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding
element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to
1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to
1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm).
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch
(25.4 mm)wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) over total length.
END OF SECTION 08411
August 2014 08411-8 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 09111
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05400 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-
bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and
ceiling joists; and roof trusses.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gauge.
August 2014 09111-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
b. Depth: 4 inches (102 mm), unless noted otherwise.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-
mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12
mm) in diameter.
C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.
D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung
system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-
metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with
installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for
anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing
required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
August 2014 09111-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for
installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,
heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch (3 mm)from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
August 2014 09111-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated
by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure
and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause
hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring
members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive
finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09111
August 2014 09111-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09111 "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board
panels to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each
trim accessory indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish
indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of
damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent
sagging.
August2014 09250-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are
mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
August 2014 09250-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories.
August2014 09250-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate
finish with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when
tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene.
b. National Gypsum Company; ProForm Perfect Spray.
c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT.
2. Texture: Fine.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
August 2014 09250-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints
of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not
force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.
ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4-to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant.
F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at
these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed.
Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise
indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required, and minimize end joints.
August 2014 09250-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically
indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 4: At ceiling panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09912
"Interior Painting."
2. Level 5: At exposed walls.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09912
"Interior Painting."
3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and
other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry,
and smooth.
August 2014 09250-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to
produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or
of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive
texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means.
If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately
remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and
other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09250
August 2014 09250-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 09512
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings.
2. Concealed suspension systems.
B. Related Requirements:
C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and
other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation
including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6-
inches- (150-mm-) in size.
1. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Sample of
each type.
2. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each
type and color.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
August2014 09512-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension-system members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot(1:48).
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed
component equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)for testing indicated.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
August 2014 09512-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical tile ceilings shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting
suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
August2014 09512-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface
according to ASTM E 795.
E. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing
pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's
full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Optima
Open Plan Ceiling System by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable product
by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
B. Surface Texture: Fine.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: ASTM E 1477; Not less than 0.90.
E. NRC: ASTM C 423; Not less than 0.95.
F. CAC: ASTM E 1414; classified with UL label on product carton, N/A.
G. AC: ASTM E 1111; classified with UL label on product carton, N/A.
H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Tegular for interface with Interlude XL 9/16" Dimensional
Tee.
I. Thickness: Fiberglass, 1" thicknesses.
J. Modular Size: 24 inches x 48 inches.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
seismic design requirements.
August 2014 09512-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of
wire. Provide wire diameter not less than indicated on drawings and required by
code.
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with
0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-)
diameter bolts.
F. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to
accommodate lateral forces.
G. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical tiles in-place.
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Interlude
XL Dimensional Tee by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable product by one
of the following:
1. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
2. Or approved equal.
B. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed
from and capped with cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or
hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G30 (Z90) coating designation.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Axiom
Building Perimeter System; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable product by
one of the following:
August 2014 09512-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
3. Fry Reglet Corporation.
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if
not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying
with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish,
and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge
details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration
of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
C. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide
manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or
referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and
attachment and other clips and complying with seismic design requirements and the
following:
1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength
and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221 M)for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.
2. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's
written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking
finish.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
c. Or Approved Equivalent.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Sealants Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound
Sealant.
b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
d. Or Approved Equivalent.
August2014 09512-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and
effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.
3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates
to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and
seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions
and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
August 2014 09512-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with
a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for
substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and
the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck.
Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or
adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into
concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment
of hanger wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member
supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not
more than 8 inches (200 mm)from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum
of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling
area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical
legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling
suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:
1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
August 2014 09512-8 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings
and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile
joints are closed by double lap of material.
1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at
borders and around penetrations through tile.
2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between
tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c.
3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the
following special inspections:
1. Compliance of seismic design.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile
ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation
of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no
tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling
hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of
acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.
1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated
fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will
test them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select one of every two
postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them
for 440 lbf(1957 N) of tension.
2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with
requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20
pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
D. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if
they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
August 2014 09512-9 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
END OF SECTION 09512
August 2014 09512-10 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 09651
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubber floor tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than
9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.
D. Product Schedule: For resilient floor tile.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
August2014 09651-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,
color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who
are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and
seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or
certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on
flat surfaces.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive
floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures
within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or
more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
August 2014 09651-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 RUBBER FLOOR TILE
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Nora
Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.; Noraplan or comparable product
by one of the following:
1. Flexco;
2. Roppe Corporation, USA;
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class I-B, homogeneous rubber tile, through mottled.
C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A
durometer per ASTM D 2240.
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Thickness: As standard with manufacturer.
F. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
G. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Legend.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement
based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor
tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive
manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
August2014 09651-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of
floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing
according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less
stringent than the following:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-
vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9
sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to
ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a
maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
resilient floor tile.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
August 2014 09651-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint
covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color
and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period.
D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09651
August2014 09651-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 09653
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less
than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products, as indicated in Finish
Legend.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150
linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient
product installed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
August 2014 09653-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive
resilient products during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures
within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or
more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.
2. Flexco.
3. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I
(solid, homogeneous).
1. Style and Location:
a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.
C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Preformed.
August 2014 09653-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement
based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by
resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for
resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
resilient products.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
August 2014 09653-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops
of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient
products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09653
August 2014 09653-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 09912
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on Gypsum
board.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed
statement of VOC content.
August 2014 09912-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Paint: 10 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color
applied.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Miller Paint.
2. Rodda Paint Co.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
August 2014 09912-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other
Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that
are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following
VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
D. Colors: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low OdorNOC: MPI #149.
2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low OdorNOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when
samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,
samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and
certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
August 2014 09912-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and
repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to
remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic
moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
August 2014 09912-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations
in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple
coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,
but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate
coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic
Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Other items as directed by Architect.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
August 2014 09912-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09912
August 2014 09912-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
SECTION 10522
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets including, but
not limited to, the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Apply decals on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.
August 2014 10522-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Verify existing cabinet is labeled to comply with
requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Re-install existing cabinet and fire extinguisher at new location as
indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where
semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights
indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:
1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of
cabinet.
B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall
thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-
protection cabinets.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square
and plumb.
August2014 10522-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection
cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces
as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 10522
August 2014 10522-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 The Bidding, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One of this project
manual and specific sections as noted apply to the work specified in Mechanical
Division 15 which encompasses Sections 15010 through 15996. This Section 15010
applies to all sections of Mechanical Division 15.
1.2 SCOPE
A. It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe
complete and functional mechanical systems.
B. Furnish and install all material, labor and equipment in accordance with these
documents.
C. Include all incidental items and work not specifically shown or specified but required by
good practice in a complete system.
D. The drawings and specifications are complementary. What is called for in one shall be
called for in both.
E. The drawings are diagrammatic but should be followed as closely as possible. Where
required by jobsite conditions, relocate and provide fittings, etc., as required.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Or approved equal: Requires approval prior to bid date.
B. Indicated:
1. The term "indicated" is a cross reference to details, notes, or schedules on the
drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and similar means
of recording requirements in the Contract Documents.
2. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used
instead of"indicated," it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross
reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.
C. Directed, Requested, Etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed,"
"requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," "accepted," and
"permitted" mean "directed by the Architect," "requested by the Architect," etc.
However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's
responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.
D. Site or Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the
work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing the work as part of the
project. The extent of the project site is shown on the drawings and is not identical with
the description of the land upon which the project is to be built.
August 2014 15010 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
E. Approved:
1. Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response to submittals, requests,
applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the
term "approved"will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities
and duties as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions.
2. In no case will "approval" by the Architect be interpreted as a release of the
Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents.
F. Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use.
1.4 STANDARDS AND CODES
A. Provide all equipment and material and perform all work in accordance with all local,
state and national codes and regulations.
B. For work on this project, comply with appropriate standards published by the following:
1. Air Diffusion Council.
2. American Gas Association.
3. Air Movement and Control Association.
4. American National Standards Institute.
5. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
6. Acoustical Society of America.
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
8. American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
9. American Society for Testing and Materials.
10. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers.
11. National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
13. National Fire Protection Association.
14. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
15. Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.5 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer's trade names, catalog numbers and material specifications used in this
specification are intended to establish the quality of equipment or materials expected.
Materials and manufacturers not listed require approval prior to the bid date.
B. Approval of substitute equipment or materials will be based upon performance, quality
and other factors deemed important by the Architect. The Contractor will be responsible
for making any changes in other work required as a result of the substitution.
August 2014 15010-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Transmit three sets of submittals to the Architect for review. The submittals shall be
bound in three-ring binders, have major topic tabs and an index. In order to expedite
approval of certain items, it is not necessary to transmit complete submittals initially.
The initial transmittal will include the binder, expected tabs and an index indicating which
items are included, the date each is transmitted, and which items are yet to be
transmitted. Future transmittals shall include a revised index. Submittal items larger
than 8 1/2" x 11 shall be a reproducible tracing.
B. Furnish performance data and technical information on all materials and equipment to
be used on the project.
C. Include shop drawings with the submittals where necessary to determine clearance,
where the Contractor proposes alternate equipment or material arrangements, and
when requested by the Architect.
D. Items transmitted for approval must be received in the Architect's office within 45 days
of contract award. All material and equipment must be approved by the Architect prior
to installation.
E. Review of submittals or shop drawings by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor
from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless specific approval has been
requested for a given deviation.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain the highest standards of workmanship throughout the project.
B. Use the latest editions of applicable and specifically referenced standards.
C. Inspect all material and equipment upon arrival at the site and return any which is not in
new condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Cooperate with other trades to assure that construction proceeds in an orderly and
timely manner.
B. Study the architectural, structural, electrical, landscape, shop and any specialty
drawings and specifications to determine required coordination.
C. Prepare detailed shop drawings where necessary to assure proper fit and necessary
clearance.
D. Refer to electrical drawings to determine voltage and phase of mechanical equipment.
August 2014 15010 - 3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.2 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain all required permits and pay for all fees and connection charges.
B. Schedule any required inspections.
3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Furnish all materials and equipment in new condition, free from defects and of size,
make, type and quality specified. Installation shall be in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
B. When two or more items of the same kind, type or class are required, use items of a
single manufacturer.
3.4 MEASUREMENTS
A. Take all measurements from reference datums established by the general contractor.
B. Establish all inverts, slopes and manhole elevations by approved instrument.
C. Provide a means of allowing the Architect to check that slopes and elevations are in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
3.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Receive all material and equipment at the jobsite or shop.
B. Use proper and sufficient equipment to handle all products employed in the project.
C. Where storage of material or equipment is necessary, it shall be a clean and
weatherproof area. Seal any openings and cover the product to assure that there will be
no corrosion or foreign matter introduced. Assure that it will be in new condition when
placed in service.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
B. The drawings in general are based upon one of the specific manufacturers listed for a
particular equipment item. The other specified manufacturers and additional approved
manufacturers of equipment may require deviations from the drawings to properly install
the particular equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
to provide the system results required. Provide the work necessary to install this
equipment.
C. Where the installation shown or specified is contrary to the manufacturer's instructions,
advise the Architect in writing of the differences before proceeding with the installation.
August 2014 15010-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
D. Provide supports for all apparatus as specified, detailed and as required by the
manufacturers of specific equipment. Anchor all roof- and floor-mounted equipment,
with size and spacing of anchor bolts as recommended by the respective equipment
manufacturer. Provide earthquake restraints on all suspended equipment, ductwork and
piping in accordance with Zone 3 seismic requirements.
E. Maintain a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions at the jobsite for all
equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work, material and equipment from loss or damage until the project is
accepted by the Owner.
B. As the work progresses, keep all equipment covered and cap all ducts and piping which
may temporarily be left unconnected.
C. Notify all other trades of any required precautions necessary to protect the work.
3.8 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Provide convenient access by location or access panel to all valves, thermometers,
gauges, fittings, cleanouts, etc. and equipment requiring periodic adjustment, reading or
service.
3.9 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Materials and work to be provided as a part of this division are:
1. Automatic temperature control wiring.
2. Equipment control wiring.
3. Interlock wiring.
4. Motor starters.
B. Wherever possible, provide all interconnect wiring within or on a piece of equipment with
the equipment unless shown or specified otherwise. An electrician licensed to perform
this type of work shall perform all field wiring.
3.10 RELATED WORK
A. The following work and materials are specified elsewhere:
1. Pipe chases, equipment pads and foundations, trenches, painting, air louvers,
louvered penthouse and access panels except as otherwise specified in this
division.
2. Framed openings, wood grounds and nailing strips, masonry, concrete and other
architectural and structural elements.
B. The following work and materials are specified in Electrical Division 16:
1. Power wiring.
2. Disconnect switches.
3. Installation of disconnect switches.
4. Installation of magnetic starters.
August 2014 15010-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.11 CLEANING
A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris and
rubbish during construction.
B. Remove all grilles and diffusers and clean ductwork of debris and dust accumulation
prior to starting fan systems.
C. Clean all mechanical equipment and plumbing fixtures of dust, grease, iron cuttings,
unnecessary stamps or shipping labels, etc.
D. Touch up factory-painted surfaces, as necessary, with paint of matching color.
3.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain one set of reproducible sepias at the jobsite for the purpose of recording work
of the mechanical contract, as actually installed.
B. Upon request, the Architect will make the original tracings available to the mechanical
contractor for printing the sepias. The Contractor shall pay the reproduction costs.
C. Record all piping and ductwork by dimensions from gridlines, below grade, above floor,
etc. Show location of all access panels, cleanouts, rough-in for future, etc. Use
eradicator to remove lines on sepias where necessary.
D. Make record drawings available to the Architect for review or printing during
construction. The Architect will pay any printing costs.
E. Deliver record drawings to the Architect promptly upon completion of the project.
3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Submit five copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Architect for
approval before project completion. Bind the instruction books with three-ring 8 1/2" x
11" side binders with plastic covers. Include an index and tabs for major systems and
equipment. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following:
B. Directories:
1. Supplier Directory: Alphabetical list of principal subcontractors and suppliers of
equipment giving names, addresses and telephone numbers.
2. Equipment Directory: List of equipment installed such as fans, air supply units,
pumps, heating and cooling equipment, plumbing fixtures, etc., giving drawing
reference numbers, location, area served, manufacturer with model number and
supplier.
3. Valve Tag Directory.
C. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Show name, address and phone number of the nearest service facility
authorized by the manufacturer.
2. Include illustrations, diagrams, instructions for installation, startup, operation,
inspections, maintenance, parts list, data sheets and other necessary materials.
August 2014 15010-6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3. Include complete electrical, schematic and connection diagrams for each
equipment item.
4. Include the name, address and phone number of contractor(s) who furnished
and who installed equipment and systems.
5. Where the literature covers more than one model, check off neatly in ink correct
model number and data for the model number.
6. In those instances where the equipment, its mode of control, or both, is job
assembled for special functions, then provide written operating and maintenance
instructions prepared by the assembler on 8 1/2" x 11" sheets.
D. Maintenance Instructions:
1. Where instructions for maintenance are not included in the manufacturer's
literature, provide supplemental data to enable proper maintenance of the
equipment installed.
2. Include specific lubrication methods and recommended frequencies along with
procedures and precautions for inspection and routine service.
E. Copy of Written Guarantee.
F. Recommended Spare Parts Stock.
3.14 OWNER MEETING
A. Schedule a meeting, or series of meetings if required, between the Contractor's
representative and the Owner for the purpose of reviewing operation and maintenance
of the building mechanical systems. The Contractor's representative shall be well
qualified and knowledgeable of the systems in this facility.
B. The meeting shall be scheduled to allow the Owner, Architect, Engineer and appropriate
subcontractors and equipment suppliers to attend.
C. The meeting shall be scheduled promptly upon completion of the project and approval of
the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
D. The Contractor shall review the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and record
drawings in detail with the Owner. He shall then walk the job with the Owner, pointing
out locations of equipment, lubrication points, controller settings, cleanouts and other
items.
3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut work as required for installation and patch to match original conditions as directed
and approved by Architect. Do not cut structural portion without Architect's approval.
B. When masonry construction must be penetrated, provide a steel pipe sleeve in opening
and grout in place in a neat manner. Leave grout surface to match existing finish.
C. Prior to cutting any existing work, locate all concealed utilities to eliminate any possible
service interruption or damage.
August 2014 15010 -7 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3.16 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SERVICES
A. Arrange time of connection with Owner. Hold duration of service outage as short as
possible.
3.17 DEMOLITION
A. General: The installation of work under this Contract includes removal of certain
existing equipment, piping, and fixtures. The extent of this work has been noted on the
Drawings; however, it is probable that relatively minor additional removal or relocation of
piping or ductwork may be necessary in order to install new work as shown. The
Contractor shall allow for and reflect in his bid the cost of this work, based on
examination of present conditions.
B. Removal: Existing equipment and piping shown or specified as removed but not
relocated shall become the property of the Owner. Dispose of waste materials and leave
the premises clean.
C. Removal of asbestos pipe insulation shall be the responsibility of the Owner. Contractor
encountering any asbestos pipe insulation shall notify Owner so that Owner can arrange
for its proper removal and disposal.
3.18 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to
accommodate their through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core-drilled
hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of ASTM
E-814, in accordance with Section 07270 - Firestopping.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15010-8 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 15053
FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing of escutcheon plates where all exposed piping and
ductwork passes through finished walls, floors and ceilings, including accessible
cabinet spaces.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Floor, wall, ceiling plates: Standard product of manufacturer.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Floor plates: deep recessed, cast brass, chrome plated.
B. Wall and ceiling plates: spun aluminum, chrome plated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure plates to pipe or structure.
B. Plates shall not penetrate insulation vapor barriers.
C. Size plates to sufficiently cover pipe sleeves and openings in finish materials.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15053 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 15054
ACCESS DOOR AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERALError! Bookmark not defined.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Providing of access doors or panels where indicated on the
drawings or required to provide access to valves, dampers, equipment and other
mechanical appurtenances requiring periodic attention and as specified herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Low Pressure Steel Ductwork, Section 15891.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide manufacturer's technical literature for all products used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cesco, Milcor, Elmdor. Cesco used as basis of selection.
2.2 NON-FIRE RATED CEILING AND WALL ACCESS PANELS
A. Style W, SR-1, SR-2, P, PX as required for wall or ceiling construction, 12" x 12"
or larger as required for ease of access.
2.3 FIRE-RATED CEILING AND WALL ACCESS PANELS
A. Style FB, U.L. listed for 1-1/2 hr for fire rated stud and masonry wall systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install access panels where shown on the drawings or as required for proper
access to mechanical appurtenances.
B. The installation of access panels is specified under other divisions according to
the construction materials shown.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15054 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15140
ANCHORS, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing of all required hangers and supports for piping,
ductwork and equipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Low Pressure Ductwork, Section 15891.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. M-CO, Grinnell, Super Strut. M-CO used for selection.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Structural Attachments: Provide all necessary structural attachments such as
concrete anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets. Hangers shall
not be suspended from other piping, equipment, etc.
B. Miscellaneous items such as hanger rod, rod couplings, turnbuckles, etc. shall
be standard figure numbers of the same manufacturer as the attachments.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide hangers and supports in accordance with the instructions furnished by
the manufacturers of these devices.
B. For horizontal pipe lines install pipe hangers with maximum hanger spacing and
maximum hanger rods as recommended in Table 9 of the 1988 edition of the
ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, Equipment Chapter 33: Where concentrated
loads of valves, fittings, etc. occur, closer spacing will be necessary and shall be
based on the weight to be supported and the maximum recommended loads for
the hanger components. Cast iron soil pipe shall be supported at every joint.
C. See structural drawings for details on attachment of hangers to wood structure.
D. Provide additional structural members where required to support equipment,
piping or ductwork.
August 2014 15140 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
E. Provide hangers and support devices in accordance with the equipment
manufacturer's instructions for all equipment.
F. Support ductwork as required by the UMC, as shown on the plans and per
SMACNA recommendations.
G. Provide seismic restraints as required for Zone 3 earthquake requirements.
H. Provide stamped signed structural drawings for equipment hangers or supports
where required by the controlling building officials.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15140-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing of all required identification systems for equipment,
piping and valves.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Ductwork Accessories, Section 15910.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. W. H. Brady Co., Seton or approved equal.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Equipment Identification: Equipment identification tags shall be three-ply, white
center, black face plastic plates with 1/2" high letters for major and 1/4" high
letters for minor equipment.
B. Piping Markers:
1. All vinyl self-sticking labels.
2. Markers shall comply with ANSI A 13.1 for width, size of letters,
background colors, etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide piece of equipment with a manufacturer's standard nameplate indicating
manufacturer's name, model number, capacities and characteristics.
B. In addition, Provide each piece of equipment with plastic tag indicating its
designation on this project (such as EF-1, GF-1, etc.) and the area served.
Mount this tag with screws, where possible, in a clearly visible location.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15190- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing of all required insulation for ductwork.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Low Pressure Ductwork, Section 15891.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation materials and accessories such as adhesives, cement, etc.shall have
composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, as tested by procedures indicated in
NFPA 255 and U.L. 723, not to exceed a flame spread index of 25 and a smoke
developed index of 50.
B. Products or their shipping cartons shall have identification of the flame spread
and smoke developed index.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manville, Knauf, Owens-Corning, Certain-teed or approved equal. Manville used
as a basis of selection.
2.2 DESCRIPTION.
A. Duct Insulation:
1. Internal: Linacoustic, mat-faced or dual density acoustical duct blanket
with minimum R-5.
2. External: Microlite, fiberglass duct insulation with FSKL jacket with
minimum R-5.
August 2014 15250- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ductwork:
1. General Requirements: Apply internal insulation in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA "Duct Liner Application
Standard." Apply internal insulation to flat sheet metal with continuous
coverage of adhesive. Use adhesive on all butt edges. Install weld pins
and clips on internal insulation 15" on center and no more than 2"
maximum from any cut or exposed edge.
2. Application:
a. All supply ductwork shall be externally insulated, or internally lined
where shown on drawings to be internally lined.
b. Round supply ductwork, externally insulated unless specified or
noted otherwise.
c. Return air ductwork outside of mechanical rooms, externally
insulated except where shown to be internally lined on drawings.
d. Exhaust air ductwork, uninsulated unless shown to be internally
lined on drawings.
e. Duct dimensions shown are net inside dimension.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15250-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide complete automatic fire sprinkler protection system(s) in the area of work
for the building renovation. Modify existing piping and add/remove heads as
required to maintain fire protection in the area of work in accordance with NFPA
requirements and the local fie bureau jurisdiction.
B. Provide a fire protection head in the elevator pit.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Section 15053.
C. Anchors, Hangers and Supports, Section 15140.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010.
B. Submittals shall include:
1. Manufacturer's catalog or technical data showing performance,
dimensions, materials of construction and recommended methods of
installation.
2. Submit locations of all inspector test stations, building drains, alarm bells
and other visible appurtenances to the architect for review.
3. Specifically note locations of exposed piping on the shop drawings for
Architect review.
4. Provide information and coordinate with electrical contractor as to
locations and power requirements for all alarms, tamper switches, flow
switches etc.
5. After Architect's review, prepare fire protection system shop drawings as
required by code showing location piping, alarm valves, piping sizes, test
tees and valves, drain valves and other related items. Submit drawings to
the governing fire bureau and appropriate insurance services for review
per owner's requirements. After changes by the reviews are made,
submit three sets of approved drawings to the Architect.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide O&M data in accordance with Section 15010.
B. O&M data shall include:
1. Manufacturer's literature for all equipment and materials.
August 2014 15300- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2. Maintenance instructions.
PART 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. System Components: Grinnell, Viking or approved equal.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Piping Material Interior): Schedule 40 black steel or steel tubing with flanged,
screwed or mechanical joint fittings.
B. Sprinkler heads to match the existing style in the adjacent office areas.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide only U.L., Inc. listed components.
B. Obtain fire protection water service from existing piping in and adjacent to the
area of work as required.
C. Provide complete designed sprinkler system modifications as required by the
Uniform Building Code, NFPA Standard 14 and the Clackamas Fire Bureau.
Provide all piping, piping modifications, heads and appurtenances as required.
D. Provide hangers, brackets, supports, anchors and related appurtenances, as
required, to support all piping and equipment provided under this section. Piping
and equipment supports shall conform to NFPA Pamphlet No. 14 and Section
15140, Anchors, Hangers and Supports.
E. Provide existing and exposed sprinkler heads matching existing styles and
appearances at the site.
F. Provide seismic bracing and support for Seismic Zone 3.
G. Fire protection piping systems to be installed in conformance with NFPA
Standard 14. Install all piping in a true and even manner with lines pitched for
drainage and system arranged so it can be entirely emptied of water.
H. Coordinate electrical connections for all flow and tamper switches, alarms and
other fire protection system electrical connections required and include the cost
of those connections in the bid price. Include in the bid price provisions to bring
power to all points of connection related to the sprinkler fire protection system.
August 2014 15300 -2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
Ceiling Areas: Sprinkler piping shall be concealed. Coordinate with the
architectural soffit construction for main pipe routing. Coordinate sprinkler head
locations with lights, speakers and other ceiling mounted appurtenances and
mount heads in the center of ceiling tiles unless shown otherwise on Architectural
Reflected Ceiling Plans.
J. Coordinate all areas requiring exposed sprinkler piping with the Architect prior to
shop drawing submittal and fabrication.
K. Perform all tests and arrange for required inspections of installed system as
required by NFPA Standard 14. Submit certificates of inspection and tests to
Architect.
3.2 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled
holes to accommodate their through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve
or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped to meet the
requirements of ASTM E-814.
3.3 Verify existing conditions prior to submission of design. Design must be
consistent with the existing fire protection system(s) at the site.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15300-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15891
SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing of all required ductwork specified or shown on the
drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Access Doors and Panels, Section 15054.
C. Anchors, Hangers and Supports, Section 15140.
D. Mechanical Insulation, Section 15250.
E. Ductwork Accessories, Section 15910.
F. Grilles and Diffusers, Section 15940.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Ductwork for heating system supply, return and exhaust air systems shall be
constructed of galvanized sheet metal. Minimum gauge and reinforcing will be in
accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Handbook.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Construct and assemble all ductwork and duct systems in accordance with latest
edition of the "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" published by SMACNA,
Chapter One "Duct Construction" of the 1988 ASHRAE Handbook and the
appropriate chapters of the latest edition of the Uniform Mechanical Code.
B. Cross brake and reinforce ductwork and plenums with structural steel members
to prevent breathing or ballooning.
C. All joints in the air distribution system shall be sealed airtight with Hardcast or 3-
M Duct Sealer 800.
D. Provide acoustical lining where specified in Section 15250, Mechanical
Insulation. All dimensions are inside net.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15891 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15899
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Providing of all required flexible ductwork.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Anchors, Hangers and Supports, Section 15140.
C. Sheet Metal Ductwork, Section 15891.
D. Ductwork Accessories, Section 15910.
E. Grilles and Diffusers, Section 15940.
F. System Balance, Section 15990.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010.
B. Submittals shall include:
1. Manufacturer's technical literature for all products used.
2. Data to show compliance with flame and smoke rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Thermaflex, Glass-Flex, Flexmaster. Thermaflex used for selection.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Flexible ductwork shall be insulated type G-KM with polymeric lining and
polyolefin outer jacket vapor barrier.
B. Joint seals to be Ventfabrics C-520 duct tape and "Panduit" straps or approved
equal.
August 2014 15899- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Construct and assemble all ductwork and duct systems in accordance with the
latest edition of the"HVAC Duct Construction Standards" published by
SMACNA, Chapter Sixteen of the 2000 Edition of the ASHRAE Handbook and
the appropriate chapters of the latest edition of the Oregon Mechanical Specialty
Code.
B. All joints in the air distribution system shall be sealed airtight.
C. Support all flexible ductwork on two-foot centers by a minimum one-inch
galvanized sheet metal strap running around the duct.
D. Extend ducts to full length prior to hanging.
E. Maximum developed length to five feet.
F. Minimum flexible duct bending radius is twice the duct diameter.
G. When suspending duct by wire from an overhead support, duct shall be level
with minimum sagging and wire should be as nearly vertical as possible.
H. Flexible ductwork will be limited to readily accessible ceiling areas only.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15899-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing of all required ductwork accessories specified or shown
on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Ductwork, Section 15891.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Damper regulators and end bearings: Ventlock or approved equal.
B. Turning vanes: Duro Dyne, Elgen All-Tight, General Sheet Metal or approved
equal.
C. Spin-in fitting: Genflex or approved equal.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Damper regulators and end bearings: 3/8 inch Figure 641 for accessible ductwork
and Figure 677 for concealed ductwork.
B. Turning vanes: Airfoil double-blade turning vanes. Single-bladed, shop fabricated
turning vanes are not acceptable except for supply diffuser plenums, see detail on
drawings.
C. Volume dampers shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized steel and have a
continuous galvanized steel shaft.
D. Spin-in fittings: SM-1 D for sheet metal ductwork
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Assure that all dampers are aligned with their regulator pointers and left open for
the air balancer. Permanently mark full open and full closed positions.
B. Install turning vanes in all mitered elbows.
August 2014 15910- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Install volume dampers in all branch ducts to outlets and where shown on drawings.
Provide regulators on all dampers.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15910 - 2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15940
GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Work included: Providing of all required grilles and diffusers specified or shown on the
drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Low Pressure Ductwork, Section 15891.
C. System Balance, Section 15990.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010.
B. Submittals shall include manufacturer's catalog or technical data showing performance,
dimensions, materials of construction. and recommended methods of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Anemostat, Krueger, Titus, J&J, Price, Carnes, Tuttle and Bailey or approved equal.
Titus used as a basis for selection.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Supply Diffuser: Ceiling Lay-In Tee Bar: Model TMSA 24" x 24"with neck size and
throw pattern shown on the drawings with frame for T-bar mounting and standard finish
to match existing.
B. Supply Diffuser - Ceiling Surface Mount: Model TMSA of neck size shown on the
drawings, standard finish with frame for flat surface mounting.
C. Return and Exhaust Grille -Ceiling Lay-In Tee Bar: Model PAR with 24x24 face with
adaptor box or transition to neck size shown on the drawings with standard
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install grilles and diffusers where shown on the drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install a gasket to assure an airtight seal between ductwork or ceiling and grille.
August 2014 15940- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Install all diffusers tight to their respective mounting surfaces.
D. Install plumb and true with room dimensions and accurately centered on projections as
shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans.
E. Paint inside of ducts behind grilles flat black.
F. Verify any special paint or color requirements prior to ordering grilles and diffusers.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15940 -2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 15990
SYSTEM BALANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Providing system balance work as specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010.
B. Ductwork Accessories, Section 15910.
C. Grilles and Diffusers, Section 15940.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Conduct the systems balance work in accordance with standard procedures and
recognized practices outlined by ASHRAE and Associated Air Balance Council.
Record all actual equipment nameplate, drive and operating data at the site.
B. After all adjustments are made, check the space for noise, vibration and drafts
and eliminate if possible.
C. Document any problems or operating difficulties which could not be rectified.
D. Upon completion of balancing work, submit one copy of final report to Engineer
for approval. Make corrections as requested. Submit four (2) copies of final
report to the contractor for inclusion in the O&M manuals.
E. Provide sets of marked balancing drawings showing air opening numbers that
correspond to the numbering system in the balancing logs with the final reports.
3.2 EXECUTION
A. Exhaust Fans:
1. Make adjustments and record data in same manner as Air Handling
Units.
B. Air Distribution System:
1. Adjust air volumes at diffusers and grilles to within plus or minus 5% of
the values shown on the plans.
August 2014 15990- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
2. Adjust diffusers and grilles for proper direction and throw.
3. Log all readings taken.
4. Mark final position of all balancing dampers.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 15990-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but
not limited to:
1. Drawings and Specifications.
2. Public ordinances, permits. Including but not limited to electrical and fire
alarm permits.
3. Payments and fees required by governing authorities for work included in
this Division.
4. Change orders.
B. Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Division, including but not limited
to:
1. Summary of Work, Section 01010.
2. Coordination, Section 01040.
3. Cutting and Patching, Section 01045.
4. Alternates, Section 01100.
5. Submittals, including Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, Section
01300.
6. Construction facilities and Temporary Controls, Section 01500.
7. Materials and Equipment, Section 01600: Substitution and Product
Options.
8. Contract Closeout, Section 01700:
a. Project Record Documents.
b. Operating and Maintenance Data.
c. Systems Demonstrations.
1.2 MECHANICAL WIRING
A. The following schedule is intended to summarize the division of work and
responsibilities between Division 15 and Division 16.
FURNISHED POWER
ITEM BY INSTALL BY WIRING CONTROL WIRING
1. Division 15 Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 16 Div. 15
Equipment Motors
2. Motor Starters, Div. 15 Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 15
Contactors and
Overload Heaters—
Integral
3. Motor Control Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 15
Centers
August 2014 16010- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
FURNISHED POWER
ITEM BY INSTALL BY WIRING CONTROL WIRING
4. Fused &Unfused Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 16
Disconnect
Switches
5. Manual Operation Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 16
Switches
6. Control Relays& Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 15
Transformers
7. Energy Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 15
Management
Control Panels
8. Motorized Solenoid Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 15
Valves
9. Duct Mounted Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 16 Div. 15—Equipment
smoke Detectors Shutdown
Div. 16—Fire Alarm
10. Fire/Smoke and Div. 15 Div. 15 Div. 16 Div. 16
Smoke Dampers
1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called
for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the
Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications. All directives and
instructions to furnish, provide, install, complete, test and methods described in
these Specifications and Drawings shall be interpreted as directives to the
Electrical Contractor unless clearly specified otherwise. It is the intent of these
specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe complete and
functional electrical systems. If errors or discrepancies are discovered, notify the
Architect immediately.
1.4 SITE VISITATION
A. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding to familiarize themselves with
existing conditions and all other factors which may affect the execution of the
work.
1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS
A. The completed installation shall conform to all applicable Federal, State and
Local Codes, Ordinances and Regulations.
B. Obtain all necessary permits and inspections required by the governing
authorities having jurisdiction over this work.
C. Furnish to the Architect a certificate of approval from the inspection authority at
the completion of the work, prior to the application for final payment.
August 2014 16010-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
1.6 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered by this Specification shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment and services to construct and install the complete electrical
system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Verify all conditions on
the job site and lay out work accordingly.
B. The work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following systems:
1. Secondary service and distribution systems.
2. Complete lighting and power systems.
3. Grounding continuity.
4. Connection of electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of
work.
5. Conduit and boxes for telecommunications system as required.
6. Fire alarm systems, connect to existing system.
7. Demolition as required.
C. The following equipment and work will be furnished under other Divisions of
Work:
1. Telephone, data and television wiring and equipment. (Note: coordinate
with above scope.)
2. Mechanical equipment motors and heaters, unless otherwise noted on
drawings.
3. Equipment control wiring beyond the provisions shown on the Electrical
Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written one-year warranty covering the work done under this Division
as required by the General Conditions. Incandescent lamps will be excluded
from this warranty.
B. Systems and Apparatus:
1. Free of defects of material and workmanship and in accord with the
Contract Documents.
2. Built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for
which it was designed.
3. Operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1 requirements.
B. Submit all electrical data in 3-point covered binders, indexed by section number,
covering all items of equipment and systems. Submit all electrical items at one
time.
C. The installation and Record Drawings called for under submittals shall show all
outlets, devices, terminal cabinets, conduits, wiring and connections required for
the complete system described. Prints of these drawings shall be submitted prior
to starting installation. The Contractor submitted drawings, when approved, will
then form the basis for installation.
August 2014 16010-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
D. Submittals will not be permitted by fax.
E. Submittals will not review unless equipment is specifically indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The use of manufacturer's names, models and numbers in this Specification is
intended to establish style, quality, appearance and usefulness. Items noted "or
equal" do not require prior approval. Items noted "approved equivalent" or
"approved substitute" require prior approval.
B. Submit for the Architect's approval, manufacturer's detailed specifications and
data sheets for all proposed substitutions. Submittals shall consist of a single
sheet, or sheets, if required, for each piece of equipment and shall give the
specific data needed for consideration of approval. All pertinent data listed in the
Specifications and in Schedules shall be furnished, including all special features.
See that all submittals are in proper order, and that all equipment will fit in the
space provided.
C. The Architect reserves the right to require the submission of an actual sample
before the acceptance of any product as an equal to that specified.
2.2 MATERIAL APPROVALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit all electrical data in 3-point covered binders, indexed by Section number,
covering all items of equipment and systems. Include wiring diagrams where
called for.
B. Review and recommendations by the Architect or Engineer are not to be
construed as change authorizations. If discrepancies between the shop
drawings submitted and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or
after the data is processed, the Contract Documents will govern. Shop drawing
review will not occur without contract cost data as outline below.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACT COST DATA
A. Furnish to the Architect a cost breakdown of the Electrical Contract.
B. The cost breakdown shall include separate amounts for material and labor for
each category listed below. Include costs data with the shop drawings submittal.
1. Secondary panels.
2. Feeders.
3. Disconnects, starters and equipment connections.
4. Branch circuit wiring and devices.
5. Data provisions.
6. Fire alarm system.
7. Lighting control, luminaires and lamps.
August 2014 16010 -4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
3.2 CHANGE ORDERS
A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with a
complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials cost without exception.
Contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be
included. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. Material
cost, as used in this section, to be Contractor's actual "invoice" cost. All
discounts shall be detailed and shown on the invoice. Labor cost shall be the
actual cost per manhour including all taxes and fees. The total estimated cost for
any change will be considered a not-to-exceed price. The supplemental cost
approval will be based on this estimate but actual change order request for
payment will be based on the contractors actual cost to perform this work and
shall be accompanied with a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials
cost with backup invoices, without exception.
3.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. The Contractor shall provide operating instructions and maintenance data, in 3-
point covered binders, for all equipment and materials called for under this
Division.
B. Submit five copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least
four weeks before final review of the Project. Assemble all data in a completely
indexed volume or volumes and identify the size, model, and features indicated
for each item.
C. Maintenance instruction manuals shall include complete cleaning and servicing
data compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Data shall show serial
numbers of each piece of equipment and complete lists of replacement parts.
3.4 ELECTRONIC INFORMATION
A. Electronic record information in AutoCAD format will be provided to the electrical
contractor upon request. A drawing release form will be sent to the contractor
and upon its return a compact disk will be made available to be picked up at
System Design Consultants, Inc office. One (1) copy of the base project
construction document files will be made available to the contractor at no charge,
each additional request will be provided at a cost of$250 per request.
B. All electrical sub contractors will make their request for the construction
documents through the electrical contractor.
3.5 RECORD INFORMATION
A. Maintain one set of construction documents marked up (red-lined) on a daily
basis as the work progresses, showing all changes, deviations, change orders,
omissions, or other variations from the contract drawings.
B. Record all conduits, stubups and equipment by dimensions from gridlines, below
grade, above floor, etc. Show location of all access panels, rough-in for future,
etc.
August 2014 16010-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Make record documents available to the Architect for review or printing during
construction.
D. On acceptance of the contractor record drawings by the Architect, the contractor
will transfer the record information in "AutoCAD" format to the electronic
"AutoCAD" drawing files. Refer to 16010-3.4(A) for obtaining documents and
applicable charges.
E. Deliver record drawings files on floppy disk to the Architect promptly upon
completion of the project. Record information added to the "AutoCAD" drawing
files is to have compatible format, linework and lettering as the original files. All
new work done by the contractor on the original drawing files is to be on a single
layer noted in the revised drawing file as "RECORD".
3.6 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Refer to Electrical Drawings for detailed information relating to the appropriate
alternates.
3.7 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Protect all electrical work and equipment installed under this Division against
damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment
found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective.
B. Switchgear, transformers, panels, light fixtures and all electrical equipment shall
be kept covered or closed to exclude dust, dirt and splashes of plaster, cement or
paint and shall be free of all such contamination before acceptance. Enclosures
and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches and other finish
defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect, if damaged.
3.8 MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE
A. Electrical service shall be maintained to all functioning portions of the building
throughout construction, except as noted below, during all normal working hours
of the building occupants. Outages to occupied areas shall be kept to a
minimum and be prearranged with the Architect or Owner's Representative. This
Contractor will be liable for any damages resulting from unscheduled outages or
for those not confined to the pre-arranged times.
B. Signal and communication systems and equipment shall be kept in operation
wherever these serve occupied or functional portions of the building. Outages of
these facilities shall be treated the same as electrical power outages.
C. Telephone services where required during the construction work will be
maintained by the telephone company. This work shall be coordinated with the
telephone company in such a manner that service, as required by the building
occupants, can be readily installed and maintained.
August 2014 16010 -6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
D. Include all costs for temporary facilities, overtime labor and necessary provisions
to maintain electrical services in the initial bid proposal. Temporary wiring and
facilities, if used, shall be removed and the site left clean before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16010-7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16040
IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served
or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LABELS
A. Panels: Typed or pre-printed white permanent materials labels with adhesive backing,
Specified Products, Inc. or equal.
B. Switchgear, Panelboards and Transformers: "Lamicoid", 3-ply laminated plastic, black
with white letters, Minimum '/4" letters.
1. Provide label on MDP to read:
THIS INSTALLATION DESIGNED BY
SYSTEM DESIGN CONSULTANTS, INC.
PORTLAND, OR
503-248-0227
(year installed)
C. Equipment: Dymo-Tape, plastic tape with adhesive backing, field printed with proper
tool.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SWITCHGEAR
A. Label the main and feeder protective devices in all distribution panels with laminated
plastic labels indicating the function or the load served.
B. Provide labels for all bussed spaces indicating size of future breaker or switch that may
be installed in the space reserved.
3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Indicate panel number with laminated plastic labels. Indicate voltage phase and feeder
source, feeder wire size, and feeder breaker or fuse size with white permanent labels on
the inside of the panel door.
B. Provide machine-printed panel directories with protective, clear transparent covers,
accurately accounting for every breaker installed, including spares. Schedules shall use
the actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work
and not the space designation on the Construction Drawings.
August 2014 16040- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Label all disconnect switches, motor starters, relays, contactors, time switches indicating
voltage, amperage, circuit number and equipment served with white permanent labels.
B. Label all transformers and busways with black and yellow 4-1/2 inch high pre-printed
adhesive backed materials.
3.4 SYSTEMS
A. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors with each conductor
identified throughout, using wraparound numbers or letters. Use the number or letters
shown where the Drawings or operation and maintenance data indicate wiring
identification.
B. Label the fire alarm and communication equipment zones, controls, indicators, etc. with
machine printed labels or indicators appropriate for the equipment installed, as supplied
or recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16040-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Section 16010 apply to this Section.
1.2 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Conduct work in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all
items of equipment. Consult the Drawings of all other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts
with cabinets, counters, equipment, structural members, etc. In general, the
architectural drawings govern but conflicts shall be resolved with the Architect prior to
rough-in.
B. Verify the physical dimension of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available
space. Coordination of the equipment to fit into the available space and the access
routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
C. Coordinate rough-in and wiring requirements for all mechanical equipment with
mechanical contractor and equipment supplier. Make installation in accordance with
rough-in and wiring diagrams provided by equipment supplier for Contractor's use.
Report immediately to architect any deviation between contract documents and actual
equipment requirements.
D. Coordinate all aspects of the electrical, telephone and other utility services with the
appropriate serving utility. No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for
connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or
Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utility.
E. Coordinate underground work with other contractors working on the site. Particular
coordination shall be performed with contractors installing storm sewer, sanitary sewer,
water and irrigation lines, to avoid conflicts. Common trenches may be used with other
trades, providing clearances required by codes and ordinances are maintained.
1.3 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
A. The Electrical Drawings accompanying these Specifications are design drawings and
generally are diagrammatic indicating approximate locations of outlets and wiring. They
do not show every offset, bend, junction box, etc., which may be required for installation
to complete the system. Minor deviations in methods, circuiting and branch circuit
distribution or arrangements to suit construction conditions are permissible.
B. The intent of the branch circuiting and control shown shall not be changed nor
homeruns combined without the approval of the Architect. Feeder runs shall not be
combined or changed.
August 2014 16050 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Cross or hash marks on conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 copper branch circuit
conductors, in addition to a grounding conductor, unless otherwise noted. Where such
marks do not appear, provide minimum of two conductors with ground, minimum No. 12,
size as required for loads and/or equipment being served. Contractor is responsible
to assure that the maximum voltage drop on any circuit does not exceed 5% at the
load. The contractor shall review panel schedule to verify wire/conduit size required.
D. Conduit sizes shown or listed on the drawings are for reference only. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to provide and install conduit sized per current NEC
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by a recognized testing
laboratory or approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by
governing codes and ordinances.
B. Materials shall be new, of the best quality. The materials shall be manufactured in
accordance with NEMA, ANSI, UL or other applicable standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a completely properly operating system for each item of equipment called for
under this work. Installations shall be in accord with the equipment manufacturer's
instructions, the best industry practices and the contract documents. Where a conflict in
these guides appear, the Architect shall be requested to provide proper clarification
before work is roughed in and his decision will be final. Work installed without such
clarification shall be removed and corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. Make installation in a neat, finished and safe manner, according to the latest published
NECA Standard of Installation under competent supervision.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work in
compliance with Section 02220.
B. For direct burial cable or non-metallic conduit, a minimum 3-inch cover of sand or clean
earth fill shall be placed all around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom. Lay
all steel conduit on a smooth level trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire
length. Water shall not be present in the trench when electrical conduit is being laid.
C. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8-inches deep and compact to 95% of maximum
density at optimum moisture to preclude settlement.
1. Interior: Bank sand or pea gravel.
2. Exterior: Excavated material with final 8-inches clean soil.
August 2014 16050-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
D. Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level of surrounding soil. All excess soil
shall be disposed of at the site as directed.
E. Provide 6-inch wide vinyl tape marked "ELECTRICAL" in backfill, 12-inches below
finished grade, above all conduit runs.
F. Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work with
General Contractor.
3.3 NOISE CONTROL
A. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back-to-back nor straight
through boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by
note, to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces.
B. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices shall not be
placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on
the Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls, common to occupied
spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively
prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space.
C. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be
noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective
and shall be replaced.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such
connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a
finished working installation.
B. Verify the location and method for connecting to each item of equipment prior to
roughing-in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before
connecting.
C. Make motor connections for the proper direction of rotation. Minimum size flex for
mechanical equipment shall be 1/2-inch except at small control devices where 3/8-inch
may be used. Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex with 6-inches
minimum slack loop. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system.
D. Control devices and wiring relating to the HVAC systems will be furnished and installed
under Division 15 except for provisions or items specifically shown on the Electrical
Drawings or specified herein.
E. Furnish all code required disconnects under this work, whether specifically shown or not.
August 2014 16050 - 3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
A. Anchoring and bracing to the building structural elements in accord with all codes and
regulations regarding seismic design conditions. The contractor is responsible to
determine the means and methods of equipment installation and support. Seismic
restraints for electrical and communication equipment shall bear the seal and signature
of a structural engineer registered in the state of Oregon, and shall be submitted to the
Architect prior to fabrication. Calculations are to be included for all connections to the
structure, considering localized effects.
B. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, fixtures, panels, outlets and
cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of
the object or objects fastened or suspended from the building structure.
C. Properly and adequately support fixtures installed under this work from the building
structure. Supports shall provide proper alignment and leveling of fixtures. Flexible
connections where permitted to exposed fixtures shall be neat and straight, without
excess slack, attached to the support device.
D. Support all junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located
above the suspended ceiling from the floor above, roof or penthouse floor structure to
prevent sagging or swaying.
E. Conduits:
1. Support suspended conduits 1-inch and larger from the overhead structural
system with metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel rod having a
safety factor of 4.
2. Conduit installed in poured concrete shall be anchored to the reinforcing steel
with No. 14 black iron wire.
3.6 ALIGNMENT
A Install panels, cabinets and equipment level and plumb, parallel with structural building
lines. Switchgear panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps,
openings or distortion. Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved
devices.
B. Fit surface panels, devices and outlets with neat, appropriate trims, plates or covers,
without overhanging edges, protruding corners or raw edges, to leave a finished
appearance.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Include cutting, patching and restoration of finishes necessary for this work. Surfaces
damaged by this work and spaces around conduits passing through floors and walls
shall be neatly patched and finished to match the adjacent construction, including
painting or other finishes. Clean up and remove all dirt and debris. This work shall all be
performed to the satisfaction of the Architect. Refer to Section 01045.
August 2014 16050-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
3.8 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to
accommodate their through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core-drilled
hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of ASTM
E-814, in accordance with Section 07270 - Firestopping.
B. Provide properly sized expansion fittings for all conduits crossing over building
expansion joints.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16050 - 5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Sections 16010 and 16050 apply to this Section.
B. Work Included:
1. Provide raceways and conduits of specified types for all electrical systems
wiring, except where clearly shown or specified otherwise. All fittings, boxes,
hangers and appurtenances shall be included.
2. Size raceways and conduits as indicated on the Drawings. Where no size is
indicated, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of
type THW conductors installed. Minimum size is 3/4".
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operational Instructions and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METALLIC CONDUITS
A. GRC: Threaded rigid heavy wall galvanized steel.
B. IMC: Threaded intermediate galvanized steel.
C. EMT: Zinc coated steel electrical metallic tubing.
D. ARC: Threaded rigid heavy wall aluminum.
E. Flex: Flexible metal with and without polyvinyl chloride jacket.
F. Liquidtight flexible conduit: Zinc steel core with smooth gray abrasion-resistant, liquid-
tight PVC cover with integral ground wire wound in steel core.
2.2 NON-METALLIC CONDUITS
A. Rigid non-metallic conduit: Type II PVC schedule 40, suitable for use with 90 degrees C
rated wire. Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 651 and carry appropriate UL listing
for above and below ground use.
2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Acceptable manufacturer(s): Wiremold, Panduit or as noted on drawings.
August 2014 16110- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
B. Type, size with quantity and spacing of outlets as shown on drawings. Provide with
snap-on cover, connectors, fittings and incidental items required for a complete
installation. Raceway shall be in continuous length as indicated on drawings.
2.4 WIREWAYS
A. Troughs: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knock-outs on standard
spacing, hinged cover.
B. Fittings: Tees, elbows, couplings as required for configuration shown on the Drawings.
C. Supports: U-shaped, 1/4-inch by 1-1/2-inch steel strap, bent and prime painted.
2.5 FITTINGS
A. GRC, IMC AND ARC:
1. The conduit itself must be threaded, threaded couplings attached by any means
are not allowed.
2. Threaded locknuts.
3. Threaded bushings: 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be of the insulated, grounding
type as required under Section 16450.
4. Expansion fittings: O-Z/Gedney Electrical Mfg. Co. type E expansion coupling
with bonding jumper for up to four inches of movement,
B. EMT:
1. Connectors: Steel compression ring type for conduit termination, with insulated
throat, suitable for conditions used.
2. Couplings: Steel compression ring type, concrete tight.
C. Weatherproof Connectors: Threaded pipe connections with waterproofing compound.
2.6 METALLIC BOXES
A. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock-
out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required, RACO or equal.
B. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings;
cast steel or aluminum with threaded hubs for use on walls.
C. Large Boxes: Boxes exceeding 4-11/16 inches square when required shall be welded
steel construction with screw cover and painted, steel gauge as required by physical
size, Hoffman, Circle AW or equal.
D. Floor Boxes:
1. Fully-adjustable, Walker 880 series, Hubbell or approved substitute.
2. Equip all floor outlets with Lexan polycarbonate flanges, black finish, Walker 817,
827 or 837 series with cover plate, Hubbell or approved substitute. Verify floor
type.
E. Floor Boxes (Power and Data):
1. Fully-adjustable flush concrete box, Walker "Resource RFB" series, model
RFB4.
August 2014 16110 -2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2. Equip all floor outlets with recessed carpet trim plate with mire management
blocks, Walker RAKMII. Verify floor type.
2.7 NON-METALLIC BOXES
A. PVC, molded enclosures, threaded hubs.
2.8 OTHERS
A. Any conduits, fittings, etc. specifically not mentioned above are not approved for use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conceal all conduits in finished spaces and elsewhere so far as practicable. Concealed
conduits shall run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. GRC and IMC
embedded in concrete below grade or in damp locations shall be made water-tight by
painting the entire male thread with Rustoleum metal primer, or equal, before assembly.
B. Route exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to structural building lines, and neatly
offset into boxes. Conduits attached directly to building surfaces shall closely follow the
surfaces. Conduit fittings shall be used to "saddle" under beams.
C. Conduits, whether exposed or concealed, shall be securely supported and fastened at
intervals of nominally every 8 feet and within 18 inches of each outlet, ell, fitting, panel,
etc.
D. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to
prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean
and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance.
E. Pack spaces around conduits with oakum and seal to prevent entrance of moisture
where conduits are installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating moisture barriers.
F. Where conduits penetrate fire rated concrete walls or floors, provide non-combustible
caulking or putty 3M fire barrier material of thickness required to equal or exceed the
fire rating of wall or floor.
3.2 CONDUIT
A. Install GRC or IMC galvanized steel conduits for wiring underground, in-cast-concrete
construction, in damp locations, in hazardous areas and where subject to mechanical
injury, with threaded fittings made up tight.
B. EMT may be employed in all other dry protected locations.
C. ARC may be used wherever EMT is acceptable, with no restriction on size.
D. Flex is required where flexibility is necessary as at motors, transformers and recessed
lighting fixtures, etc. Flex shall be jacketed type, except where concealed in dry
locations and spaces such as ceiling cavities.
August 2014 16110-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
E. PVC may be used underground, under interior slabs or where scheduled or noted on the
Drawings. Make connections with waterproof solvent cement. Provide GRC at 60
degree and larger bends and where penetrating slabs or elling up above grade in
exterior locations. PVC conduit shall not be installed less than 30" under roadways or
areas subject to heavy traffic. Provide a ground wire sized per code in all PVC conduits.
Conductor quantities indicated in conduits do not include ground wires unless otherwise
noted.
F. MC cable may be used as the extension from the homerun branch circuit j-box point to
utilization devices. Maximum number of branch circuits served by an MC run shall be
two or less. MC cable may not be utilized in the Kitchen and the assembly spaces.
3.3 RACEWAYS
A. Surface metal raceway with snap-in cover may be used in finished spaces only as
specified, or shown on Drawings.
B. Surface metal wireways may be installed at locations to serve motor starters or other
control devices where required by a multitude of wiring interconnections or physical
layout.
C. Expansion Joints:
1. All conduits crossing expansion joints where cast in concrete shall be provided
with expansion-deflection fittings, equivalent to OZ/Gedney AXDX, installed per
manufacturers recommendations.
2. All conduits three inches and larger where not cast in concrete shall be rigidly
secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint
with an expansion-deflection fitting across the joint, equivalent to OZ/Gedney
AXDX, installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. All conduits less than three inches where not cast in concrete shall be provided
with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of the expansion joint,
connected together with 15 inches of slack (a minimum of 15 inches longer than
the straight line length) flexible conduit with copper green ground bonding
jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as
indicated for conduits three inch and larger, may be installed.
D. Seismic Joints
1. No conduits cast in concrete shall be allowed to cross a seismic joint.
2. All conduits shall be provided with junction boxes securely fastened on both
sides of the expansion joint, connected together with 15 inches of slack (a
minimum of 15 inches longer than the straight line length) flexible conduit with
copper green ground bonding jumper. Prior to installation, verify with Architect
that the 15 inches is adequate for the designed movement, and if not, increase
this length as required.
3.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. The raceway system shall provide a complete enclosure that protects the wires installed
therein against damage.
B. There shall not be any openings that exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) in width on surfaces
that are accessible following installation of the system.
August 2014 16110-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.5 FITTINGS
A. Metallic raceways and conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes,
panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electrical continuity. All conduit joints
shall be cut square, reamed smooth with all fittings drawn up tight.
3.6 BOXES
A. Outlet boxes shall be of code required size to accommodate all wires, fittings and
devices. Provide multi-gang boxes as required to accept devices installed with no more
than one device per gang. Equip all metallic boxes with grounding provisions.
B. Flush wall switch and receptacle outlets used with conduit systems shall be 4 inches
square, 1-1/2 inches or more deep, with one or two-gang plaster ring mounted vertically.
Where three or more devices are at one location, use one piece multiple gang tile box or
gang box with suitable device ring.
C. Wall bracket and ceiling surface mounted lighting fixture outlets shall be 4-inch octagon,
1-1/2-inches deep with 3/8-inch fixture stud where required. Wall bracket outlets to
have single gang opening where required to accommodate fixture canopy. Provide
larger boxes or extension rings where quantity of wires installed requires more cubic
capacity.
D. Boxes for the special systems shall be suitable for the equipment installed. Coordinate
size and type with the system supplier.
E. Provide pull boxes where shown, or in conduit runs greater than 100 feet, or where
required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree
bends or equivalent. Use galvanized boxes of code required size with removable covers
installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed. Do not locate pull
boxes or junction boxes in finished areas unless specifically shown or special permission
is obtained from Architect.
F. Boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces or not more than 1/8-inch below surface and
be level and plumb. Long screws with spacers or shims for mounting devices will not be
acceptable. No combustible material shall be exposed to wiring at outlets.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16110-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Sections 16010 and 16050 apply to this Section.
B. Work Included:
1. Deliver conductors to the job site in cartons, protective covers or on reels.
2. Conductors for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer except as noted.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS - 600 V
A. Type:
1. No. 12 AWG minimum size unless noted otherwise.
2. No. 8 and larger, stranded, Class B.
B. Stranding: Copper, concentric or compressed
C. Insulation: THHN, THWN, XHHW unless noted or specified otherwise.
D. Through wiring in fluorescent fixtures shall be rated for 90 degree C.
E. Manufacturers: G.E., Hatfield, Anaconda, Rome or equal.
2.2 CORD DROPS AND PORTABLE CORDS
A. Copper type "S" or "SO" heavy duty, rubber insulated unless otherwise noted.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Branch Circuit Conductor Splices: Live spring type, Scotch-Lok, Ideal Wing Nut or self-
stripping type, 3M Series 560.
B. Cable Splices: Compression tool applied sleeves, Kearney, Burndy or equal with 600V
heat shrink insulation.
C. Lugs: Conductors no. 6 and larger, except on molded case circuit breakers, two hole,
long barrel pressure tool set Thomas & Betts No. 54,000 series, Burndy "Hydent",
Anderson Electric VCEL, or approved.
August 2014 16120 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and
raceway entrances after the pull is made.
B. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding pulling tensions,
bending radii of the cable and compounds.
C. Conductors entering terminal or junction boxes mounted on hermetically sealed
refrigeration compressor motors shall be copper.
D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be
pulled in until all bushings are installed and raceways terminations are completed. Wire
shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is poured
and forms are stripped.
E. Conductor sizes shown on the Drawings are for copper only.
3.2 CONNECTORS
A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool applied spade flared
lug when terminating at a screw connection.
B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight
hour period.
C. All tool-applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's
recommendations and physically checked for tightness.
3.3 COLOR CODING
A. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A-B-C left-to-right or A-B-C
top-to-bottom.
B. Switchlegs, travelers, etc. to be consistent with the phases to which connected or a color
distinctive from that listed.
C. Under 250 Volts Phase-to-Phase:
Phase A - Black Neutral - White
Phase B - RedGround - Green
Phase C — Blue
D. Over 250 Volts Phase-to-Phase:
Phase A - Brown Neutral - White with tracer
Phase B - Orange Ground - Green
Phase C - Yellow
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16120-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16123
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Sections 16010 and 16050 apply to this Section.
B. Work Included: Provide wiring devices and plates or blank plates only for all outlet
boxes shown.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instructions and Maintenance Data.
D. Warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade with special devices as noted on the
Drawings. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein without
reference to catalog number, such device shall be of same grade and manufacture as
specified below. Furnish a matching cap for all special purpose devices that do not
have the common 120 volt NEMA 5-15R or 5-20R configuration.
B. Comparable grade devices to those listed as manufactured by Leviton and Pass &
Seymour, are approved. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall be
by the same manufacturer and have identical appearance characteristics, unless noted
otherwise.
2.2 WALL SWITCHES
A. Line voltage switches, 20 ampere, 120 volt, quiet type, Hubbell 1221 series, gray
exposed finish.
B. Switch with pilot, lighted clear toggle, Hubbell 1221-PL.
2.3 Wall Box Dimmers:
A. Gray finish, size for loads.
B. Incandescent:
1. Modular full wave solid state unit with integral quiet on-off switch and audible and
electromagnetic noise filters.
2. Thin profile.
August 2014 16123- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1 a
3. 1,000 watt (unless noted otherwise)
4. 120/277 volt rated.
5. Lutron Nova T (NT-1000), Lutron Vareo (V-1000) or approved.
C. Fluorescent:
1. Modular full wave solid state unit with integral quiet on-off switch and audible and
electromagnetic noise filters.
2. Thin profile.
3. 1,000 watt (unless noted otherwise)
4. 120/277 volt rated.
5. Lutron Nova T, Lutron Vareo or approved. Verify compatibility of dimmer switch
with ballast being served.
2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SWITCHING BYPASS
A. Provide and install Emergency Shunt Relay (NC contact) where indicated on drawing or
herein. Emergency shunt relays are to be UL 924 listed devices.
B. Products: (or approved substitute)
1. Lighting Control & Design, Inc. part number GR2001ES-120-3
2. Nine 24, Inc. part number BTLC-R
3. Bodine part number GTD20A
C. Operation: Upon loss of Normal (non-emergency) power, the contactor will close,
bypassing the room lighting switch and illuminating the luminaire.
2.5 Emergency Off Pushbuttons:
A. Electrical panelboard remote emergency off switch, full guard, red pushbutton,
nameplate to read "POWER OFF" with stainless steel finish plate. Pushbutton to be
connected to panelboard shunt-trip main circuit breaker, Square D Class 9001 type
SKRIRH13 with KN499 nameplate, or approved.
B. Gas solenoid remote emergency on/off switch, full guard, yellow pushbutton, nameplate
to read "GAS ON/OFF" with stainless steel finish plate. Pushbutton to be connected to
gas system solenoid valve. Square D Class 9001 type SKRIYH13 with KN499
nameplate, or approved.
2.6 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex, 20 ampere, 3-wire, 2-pole grounding, NEMA 5-20R, Hubbell 5352 series, gray
exposed finish.
B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting (GFCI/GFI): 20 ampere, 3-wire, 2-pole grounding,
NEMA 5-20R, gray exposed finish, Hubbell GF5252 series or approved substitute.
C. Tamperproof Duplex, 20 ampere, 3-wire, 2-pole grounding, NEMA 5-20R, Hubbell
HBL8300SGGY series, gray exposed finish.
D. Clock outlets, Hubbell No. 5235, gray receptacle, plate with clock hanger.
E. Special purpose receptacles, as noted on Drawings.
August 2014 16123 -2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2.7 PLATES AND COVERS
A. Flush Finish Plates: .040-inch thick, type 302 stainless steel, brush finish, Leviton or
Pass & Seymour.
B. Surface Covers: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2-inch raised industrial type
with openings appropriate for device installed.
C. Weatherproof:
1. Damp locations: Hubbell HBL5205WO cover mounted horizontally with hinges
up.
2. Wet locations: Hubbell WP26M, Thomas & Betts Red-Dot series CKNM
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines.
B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched
or splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted.
C. Wall-mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the
Drawings.
D. Receptacles shall be tested for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground
faults. Correct any defective wiring.
E. All special plugs provided with the receptacles shall be given to the Owner in their
cartons and a letter stating the date and the Owner's representative that received the
materials.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16123 - 3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16180
OVERCURRENT DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Sections 16010, 16050, 16160 and 16164 apply to this
Section.
B. Work Included:
1. Provide overcurrent protective devices of the proper characteristics for the load
served.
2. Coordinate fuse size and circuit breaker combinations for selective tripping with
minimum interruption of service.
3. Provide fuses as indicated on the drawings, sized per NEC and appropriate for
the load served as required for a fully operational system.
4. All fuses shall be furnished of the same manufacturer.
5. All circuit breakers shall be furnished of the same manufacture as the distribution
panel and branch panelboards.
6. All fuses shall be installed by the electrical contractor at job-site and only when
equipment is to be energized. Fuses shall not be installed during shipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation and Maintenance data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSES
A. Provide 100,000 AIC, Current Limiting, UL, Time Delay Fuses.
B. For Feeders 601 amps to 6000 amps: Class L, KRP-C()SP Time Delay.
C. For Feeders 600 amps and less:
1. Class RK-1, LPS-RK()SP for 600 Volt, Dual Element.
2. Class RK-1, LPN-RK()SP for 250 Volt, Dual Element.
3. Class J, LPJOSP for 600 Volt& below, Dual Element.
D. For Motor Circuits 600 Volts and Below: Class RK-1 and Class J Sized @ 125% FLC of
Motor.
E. Manufacturer: Bussmann System 300 Low-Peak, Littelfuse.
August 2014 16180- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type. Breakers shall have short
circuit capacity rating to withstand the maximum short circuit duty which can be expected
at the breaker location in the electrical system. Breakers mounted in branch
panelboards shall be of the bolt-in type.
B. Minimum short circuit rating for any circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C. for 120V and 208V
breakers, 22,000 A.I.C. for 277V and 480V breakers.
C. Provide circuit breaker lock-on handle guards to prevent accidental shut-off of equipment
for breakers supplying time clocks, refrigeration, fire alarm, unswitched egress lighting
and like systems.
2.3 SPARE FUSES AND SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Provide 10% spare fuses, but not less than (3) of any one size and type.
B. Provide Bussmann spare fuse cabinet(s)#SFC as required for spare fuses. Install
cabinet in electrical room.
2.4 SUBSTITUTION APPROVALS
A. If the electrical contractor wishes to furnish materials other than those specified, a
written request, along with a complete short circuit and selective coordination study,
shall be submitted to the engineer for evaluation at least 10 days prior to bid date. If the
engineer's evaluation indicates acceptance, a written addendum will be issued listing the
other acceptable manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FUSES
A. Install fuses for motor protection to best protect the motor without nuisance tripping.
B. Provide one complete set of spare fuses of each amperage used on this project. Store
spare fuses in a metal, hinged door cabinet located adjacent to the Main Distribution
Panel. Label cabinet.
C. Provide pullers for fuses, stored with fuses in cabinet.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16180-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Sections 16010, 16050, 16120 and 16123 apply to this
Section.
B. Work Included:
1. Provide complete building grounding system.
2. Provide ground bus bar at each telephone demarcation and data distribution
location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. Bare or green insulated copper.
2.2 GROUND ROD CONNECTORS
A. Cast, set screw or bolted type.
2.3 ELECTRODES
A. Copper clad steel minimum 3/4-inch diameter by 8 feet long.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding system will consist of the following:
1. Minimum of 20' bare no. 4 copper concrete-encase grounding conductor.
2. Provide bond to building steel.
3. provide bond to cold water piping within 5' of building entry.
4. Provide bond to minimum of 2 of ground rods.
B. Establish a ground for each separately derived system, e.g., transformers and
generators, per NEC 250-30.
C. All grounding conductors shall be sized in accord with the National Electrical Code.
D. Grounding conductor connectors shall be made up tight and located for future servicing
and to ensure low impedance.
E. Ground the electrical system, the cold water service, structural steel, and transformers to
the building ground grid.
F. All feeder and service raceways shall be grounded.
August 2014 16450- 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
G. All plug-in receptacles shall be bonded to the boxes, raceways and grounding conductor.
H. Provide equipment grounding conductor in all conduit runs.
Provide insulated grounding conductor in all branch circuit wiring serving Classrooms,
Administration offices and all data locations.
J. Provide bonding jumper between ground and neutral bus at main service.
3.2 GROUND BUS BAR (TELEPHONE DEMARCATION AND DATA DISTRIBUTION)
A. Provide & install copper ground bus bar on isolators, 6" x 2" minimum. Install 1 -#6
insulated conductor to the building grounding connection at the main distribution panel.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16450-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Sections 16010 and 16050 applies, 16100 applies to
work in this Section.
B. Work Included:
1. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of type
designated and appropriate for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings
without a type designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar
or like locations.
2. Where a fixture type designation has been omitted and cannot be determined by
the Contractor, request a clarification from the Architect and provide a suitable
fixture type as directed at no additional cost.
3. Coordinate installation of lighting fixtures with the ceiling installation and all other
trades to provide a total system that is neat and orderly in appearance.
4. Verify ceiling types with architectural specifications and drawings.
5. Provide luminaires complete with lamps, ballasts, reflectors, diffusers, lenses,
shielding, hangers, accessories and fittings.
6. Store and handle so as not to subject materials to corrosion or mechanical
damage from environment and/or construction.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaires shall be U.L. listed and be manufactured in accordance with appropriate U.L.
and ANSI standards and shall bear U.L. label appropriate for intended use.
B. The lighting designated for this project was based on fixture types and manufacturers as
specified. If substitution of other than those specified is proposed for an alternate,
provide the data and the operating fixtures both as specified and alleged equal. The
Architect/Engineer reserves the right to request full photometric analysis of area affected
by the proposed substitution prior to acceptance or denial.
C. Equality shall be determined by comparisons of actual fixtures and the following fixture
characteristics.
1. Performance:
a. Distribution
b. Utilization
c. Average brightness/maximum brightness
d. Spacing to mounting height ratio
e. Comfort probability
f. Energy life-cycle analysis.
2. Construction:
a. Engineering
b. Workmanship
c. Rigidity
August 2014 16500-1 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
d. Permanence of materials and finishes; Durability
3. Installation Ease:
a. Captive parts and captive hardware
b. Provision for leveling
c. Through-wiring ease
4. Maintenance:
a. Relamping ease
b. Replacement of ballast and lamp sockets
5. Appearance:
a. Light tightness
b. Neat, trim styling
c. Aesthetic architectural value
6. Availability:
a. Lead time
7. Sustainable Design Performance Indicators:
a. Environmental performance in manufacturing
b. Manufacturing sustainability policies
c. ISO 14001 certification or equivalent environmental management
systems.
d. ISO 9001 certification for quality assurance
e. Annual environmental performance or sustainability reports.
f. Environmentally responsible materials and resources.
g. Regional availability of materials and resources.
h. Regional production and manufacturing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Recessed fixtures shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which
they are installed without leaks or gaps. Contractor to verify ceiling types at all locations
and provide appropriate trim kit for each fixture. Where necessary, install heat resistant
non-rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or moisture from entering between fixture trim
and the surface to which they are mounted.
B. Fixtures installed under canopies, roof or open porches, and similar damp or wet
locations shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations.
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recessed luminaires shall be IC-rated when installed at locations where insulation will
come in direct contact with fixture. Contractor to verify ceiling assembly makeup at all
fixture locations.
August 2014 16500-2 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Prismatic diffusers shall be extruded of clear acrylic plastic, 0.125-inch overall thickness,
No. 12 pattern as manufactured by KHS unless otherwise specified in the fixture
schedule by catalog number or remarks.
B. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average
reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall
be prepared for finishing with a 5-step zinc phosphating process.
C. Provide fixtures of lengths as shown on drawings. For continuous fixtures, furnish joiner
plates, end plates and all required fittings.
2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES
A. Ballasts shall be CBM labeled, high power factor, constant wattage auto-transformer
type.
2.5 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES
A. Fixture dimensions shall be proper for the various wattages noted on the plans and as
recommended by the fixture manufacturer or as specified.
B. Aligners shall be of the ball type providing nominally 45 degree movement either side of
center.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Lamp each fixture with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific fixture type and as
indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips or approved
equal.
B. Fluorescent lamps shall be high-efficiency, Sylvania F032T8/835XPS/ECO Series for
general use with other lengths and types to be similar series, or as required by the
fixture specified. CRI minimum 85, color 3500 K. Provide lamps compliant with Federal
Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). Equivalent manufactured by Advance
or Motorola is acceptable provided documentation is submitted at time of shop drawings
indicating all lamps with equivalent characteristics are utilized on project..
C. Lamps will meet the requirements of CEE (Consortium For Energy Efficiency)
D. Incandescent lamps, inside frosted, 130 volt rated except where otherwise specified.
Provide reflector lamp for fixtures designed and cataloged for such lamps unless
specified otherwise, 130 volt rated.
E. High pressure sodium lamps, clear, color improved, mogul base.
F. Provide shop drawing documentation on all lamps being utilized on project. Information
shall include but not limited to wattage, CRI, lamp life, color and manufacturer.
August 2014 16500-3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
2.7 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent
1. Electronic, <10% THD.
2. Ballasts will meet the requirements of CEE (Consortium for Energy Efficiency)
[www.cee 1.org]
3. Manufacturers: Osram-Sylvania QHE 2X32T8/UNV INS-SC (2-lamp),
QHE 3X32T8/UNV INS-SC (3-lamp), or equivalent by Advance, Motorola or
Universal. Provide documentation at time of shop drawings for all ballasts
utilized on project.
2.8 FLUORESCENT BATTERY BACKUP BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Battery backups ballasts for luminaires with T8 or T5 lamps will have a
minimum initial output of 1400 lumens. Lithonia PS1400 or approved substitute.
B. Fluorescent Battery backups ballasts for luminaires with compact fluorescent lamps will
have a minimum initial output of 500 lumens. Lithonia PSDL series or approved
substitute.
2.9 LIGHTING LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
A. See Drawings.
PART 3 GENERAL
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable mounting frames where
required for recessed fixtures.
B. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in
operation. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the
Contractor shall clean them at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the
architectural reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and
alignment, shall be given by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported by separate
means from the building structure per applicable seismic requirements and not from the
ceiling system, ductwork, piping or other systems.
D. Fixtures shall be aimed or installed to provide the lighting pattern for which the fixture is
designed.
E. Fixtures recessed into fire-rated ceiling assemblies shall include system maintaining
such rating around fixture.
F. Fixtures located in Mechanical rooms and storage/utility rooms to be coordinated with
duct work, piping and structural members. Adjust stems as required for proper
illumination of the area.
G. Set poles straight and plumb and grout around pole base as required.
August 2014 16500-4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
3.2 WIRING
A. Recessed fixtures served from a junction box above the ceiling may be connected with
3/8-inch flex, 2 No. 18. Provide 3 No. 18 wires where dual circuiting is called for.
Provide ground continuity.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16500-5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Furnish and install a complete Bidder Designed local addressable analog fire
alarm system as specified herein and as required by Fire Marshall with
jurisdiction. The system is existing and will be modified to cover the remodel
areas. Manufacture's models numbers listed are for reference only and intended
to show quality of components to be provided. All system components shall be of
one system manufacturer. All equipment shall be UL, FM listed and meet NFPA
72. All equipment and devices shall be listed by UL Inc., or approved by F.M.
Laboratories. Catalog numbers specified in the following are those of Fire
Control Instruments. It is intended that other manufacturers of similar systems
be acceptable provided such systems meet or exceed minimum material
properties of those products specified and such systems comply with this
Section. ALL other manufacturers require prior approval. See Section,
Substitutions and Product Options, for procedures for obtaining approval of
alternate systems. All system components shall be of one system manufacturer.
Several wall and ceiling surfaces are critical to remain clear of devices, indicate
proposed locations and heights of all devices in shop drawings for approval by
Architect for all locations prior to initiation of work.
2. System shall include but not be limited to all controls, power supply, signal
initiating and sounding devices, conduit, wiring and all other equipment
necessary for a complete and operating system. All equipment shall be
American made and assembled.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16010: General Provisions
B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 16110: Conduits, Raceways, Boxes and Fittings
D. Section 16040: Identification
E. Section 16120: Conductors and Connectors
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Operation of any manual or automatic initiating device shall cause an alarm to sound,
activate the Control-By-Event Program, indicate on the control panel the point in
alarm/trouble, print in English language the alarm location/description and perform all
auxiliary functions.
August 2014 16721 - 1 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
B. System shall be style 4, class B, on all communication and initiating loops. Any fault in
the circuits shall be annunciated on the display and printed with time, date, location and
type of the system fault.
C. System shall utilize a single pair of wires to power, transmit and receive data from the
addressable analog initiating devices and to transmit commands to the remote control
points. The wire shall be sized for the length of communications loop but in no event
shall it be less than #18-2 wire size. To facilitate low cost additions to the system,
systems using shielded cable is not be acceptable.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Point Program Schedule.
C. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data.
D. Shop Drawings (AutoCAD format).
E. Wiring Diagrams (AutoCAD format).
F. Floor Plans (AutoCAD format).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Catalog numbers of Fire Control Instruments are used to identify quality, appearance
and operation of system components. Approved manufacturer: Match Existing
B. Documentation from the manufacturer shall be presented to the Architect and Engineer
certifying that the persons making the final connections, system programming, checkout
and providing the warranty are factory trained technicians in the employ of the factory
authorized franchised dealer for the system installed.
2.2 CONTROL PANEL
A. Microprocessor based, addressable analog point identified system utilizing #16-gauge
two wire style 4 communication loop. Control to be mounted in a 16-gauge red steel
cabinet with a dead front design. Cabinet shall be designed for two level access. Level
1 to give access to the interface control panel. Level 2 to give access to the electronics.
Model FCID-A.
B. Control to meet NFPA 71, 72A, B, C, & D, UL listed and power limited per UL 864.
C. Panel to provide two signal circuits, remote station output, alarm contacts, trouble
contacts and RS232 output for printer remote CRT and remote polling interface.
August 2014 16721 -2 6687/Durham O&M Phase la
D. Hardware to provide for alarm silence, trouble silence, alarm/trouble acknowledge, reset
switch, alarm display, green power indicator and system communication interface for
remote polling of the system status. System shall support both nickel cadmium or
sealed lead-acid batteries. Power supply shall provide 4 amperes of filtered power @ 24
VDC.
E. Failsafe auxiliary degrade alarm circuit hardware shall be incorporated in the control to
enable the system, upon receiving an alarm signal, to sound the fire alarm and send a
signal to the fire department even when the CPU has failed.
F. System shall be capable of addressing and operating analog smoke detectors, manual
pull stations, open contact devices and addressable auxiliary control relays on the same
two wire unshielded communication loop. Addressing of the devices shall be done by
two rotary switches at time of device installation. On line program addressing shall not
be acceptable.
G. Addressable Output Modules shall connect to the same loop as the initiating devices and
provide either a form "C" relay contact for auxiliary control or a programmable indicating
circuit. The indicating circuit shall be configurable as a 24 vdc standard bell circuit or
VRMS speaker circuit. The AOM may be programmed to transfer from either a trouble
or alarm input from any or combination of any addressable device. Addressed via rotary
switch. Model AOM.
H. Addressable Monitor Modules shall provide an address for a single, normally open
initiating device such as a waterflow switch, manual station, etc. The monitor module
shall be UL approved to extend the sensor loop to lengths up to 2,500'. Addressed via
rotary switch. Model AMM-2.
Analog Ionization Smoke Detectors shall provide for individual addressing of each
detector. The sensor is constantly monitored to measure any change in its sensitivity
due to the environment caused by dirt, aging, temperature, humidity, etc. It shall give an
advanced indication to the FCID-A of the need for maintenance and can be specific as to
where the maintenance is needed. It is to be mounted on a two wire standard device
base. Model ASD-I.
J. Analog Photoelectric Smoke Detectors shall provide for individual addressing of each
detector. The sensor is constantly monitored to measure any change in its sensitivity
due to the environment caused by dirt, aging, temperature, humidity, etc. It shall give an
advanced indication to the FCID-A of the need for maintenance and can be specific as to
where the maintenance is needed. It is to be mounted on a two wire standard device
base. Model ASD-P.
K. Analog Thermal Detectors consist of a dual thermistor sensing circuit for fast response.
There sensors provide open area protection with fifty foot spacing. The sensor are
continually monitored to measure any changes in their sensitivity due to temperature. It
shall give an advanced indication to the FCID-A of the need for maintenance and can be
specific as to where the maintenance is needed. It is to be mounted on a two wire
standard device base. Model ATD.
August 2014 16721 - 3 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
L. Fault Indicator Module is provided to protect the system against wire-to-wire short
circuits on the communication loops. The modules should be spaced between groups of
sensors in a loop to protect the balance of the devices. In the event of a short circuit the
fault isolator is to provide protection for the communication circuit prior to its position of
the loop. Model M500X.
M. Decoder Driver Module shall provide programmable control of up to two hundred and
sixty devices and/or system functions. The DDM interfaces with the FCID-A control
panel using a non-shield four conductor eighteen gauge cable. The location of the DDM
unit from the FCID-A may be up to 10,000 feet away. Multiple units may be added to
expand the output driver points to the level required. Model FCI-DDM.
N. Duct Housing is provided to allow for the application of the ASD-I and the ASD-P
sensors to monitor the high velocity air in HVAC duct areas. Each duct housing requires
one of either sensor type. The duct housing requires a secondary source of power to
provide fan shut down and other auxiliary function relays. Model DH500.
2.3 SOFTWARE
A. The Field Configuration Program shall provide all of the programmable operating
instructions for the system. The resident program shall be stored on non-volatile
EEPROM. The FCP shall allow for the following features:
1. Alarm Verification
2. 1-9 Walk Test Zones
3. Dual Walk Test Modes
4. Detector Sensitivity Set Points
5. Day/Night Sensor Sensitivity Settings
6. Flashing and Nonflashing Detector LED's
7. Semi-annual Service Reminder
8. Dirty Detector Indicators
9. Drift Compensation
10. Eight Hour Analog Sensor Testing
11. 500 Event History Log
B. Programming shall be performed at the location of the fire alarm control using a lap-top
computer. It shall be possible to program the system without shutting the system down.
Programming shall be done off line. Installing the program into the system shall be done
by one man from in front of the control panel using the data transfer command. Systems
using two man programming loading are not acceptable. A hard copy of the system is to
be up-dated and maintained at the site. A proposal for the system programming
software shall be made available to the facility manager for his/her use, at his/her option.
Software will allow the user to reprogram system points, add system points, assign walk
test zones, program sensor sensitivity, program day-night sensor levels, add or change
point descriptions and update the data file.
August 2014 16721 -4 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Drift Compensation Program shall be resident and active in the operating system. The
DCP is to survey and analyze the analog sensors for sensor level adjustments not
caused by a fire condition. When abnormalities are detected and verified to be
consistent, the DCP will adjust the programmed sensitivity of the sensor to provide the
FCID-A with a compensated sensor level equal to that which was programmed into the
system as the desired sensitivity level. This compensation adjustment must be capable
of going beyond the 1-3 volt sensor level window to insure the system against false
alarm. Systems which do not are not acceptable.
D. Each analog address shall be programmed for:
1. Device description
2. Device location
3. Verification operation to minimize false alarms.
4. Logic command set per if-and-or-count statements.
5. Walk test zone 1-9 or all.
6. Day sensor sensitivity set point.
7. Night sensor sensitivity set point.
8. Alarm panel indicating circuit#1.
9. Alarm panel indicating circuit#2.
10. Alarm municipal output.
11. Activate select AOM's by unit or groups.
12. Activate select DDM outputs.
E. Programmed control point activation shall include selective control of HVAC, door holder
release, elevator recall, fire pump control, stairwell pressurization fans, etc.
F. Bell circuits shall be programmed for sounding steady, march time (60bpm), march time
(120bpm), coded or temporal.
2.4 ANNUNCIATORS
A. Annunciator shall be a keyboard display module. Each alarm/trouble condition shall
appear in English language with the description and location of the alarm/trouble. Model
KDM/40
B. Printer shall be a dot matrix, 80 column. Each alarm/trouble condition shall print in
English the alarm/trouble type, location, time and date. Printer shall connect via the
RS232 port. Printer is to be supervised for proper operation. Model FC-PTR.
C. Provide remote annunciators in Main Office. Equivalent to KMD-40R with enclosures.
2.5 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A. Analog ionization smoke detector: Dual chamber, twist lock head, two wire base and
pulsing LED which lights steady to indicate alarm. It shall be possible to replace the
smoke detector head without rewiring. Addressed at time of installation via rotary switch
assignment. Model ASD-I. Apartment unit detectors shall have integral mini-horns
B. Analog photoelectric smoke detector: LED light source, twist lock head, two wire base
and pulsing LED which lights steady to indicate alarm. It shall be possible to replace the
smoke detector head without rewiring. Addressed at time of installation via rotary switch
assignment. Model ASD-P
August 2014 16721 -5 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. Analog thermal detector: Dual thermistor sensing circuit, twist lock head, two wire base
and pulsing LED which lights steady to indicate alarm. It shall be possible to replace the
thermal head without rewiring. Addressed at time of installation via rotary switch
assignment. Model ATD.
D. Manual Pull Station: Semi-flush, red enamel finish, single action, four wire. Station to
be keyed the same as the fire control panel. Addressed at time of installation via rotary
switch assignment. Model MS-6/AMM-2.
2.6 ALARM INDICATING DEVICES
A. Horns shall be combination horn and ADA approved strobe lights. Operating on 24
VDC, polarized. Spacing of the units shall not exceed one hundred feet in all common
areas as shown on the drawings. FCI #EHDL1WM.
B. Strobe lights shall be triangular with "FIRE" on white plastic lens, polarized 24 VDC,
mounting single gang or four square boxes. Front of the unit shall allow for light levels of
100 candela as required by ADA. Model WMT24.
C. Piezoelectric mini-horns and mini-strobe horns, UL listed, mounting in single gang
boxes, flush mounted. Strobes shall allow for light levels as required by ADA. Model
MIZ-24-R & MIZ-24-WM-VF-R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OPERATION
A. The fire alarm components (i.e. pull stations, smoke detectors, ionization detectors,
horns, magnetic door holders, fire alarm panel, batteries, chargers, fire alarm cable, etc.)
will be supplied, installed and connected by Division 28 Contract work.
B. The fire alarm system operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any pull station or
automatic detection device shall be as follows:
1. Sound the building audible alarm devices.
2. Display on the control panel the English language description of the alarm and its
location.
3. Print on the printer the alarm type, location, time and date.
4. Activate programmed output modules and DDM points.
5. Activate the municipal city box connection.
6. Log in the event buffer all system activity.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment wiring shown on the drawings is diagrammatic to show intended function.
Equipment supplier shall provide complete wiring diagrams to the contractor for
installation.
B. Transmission wiring shall be#16 two conductor twisted pair, FPL rated cable. Shielded
cable is not acceptable due to high installation cost.
August 2014 16721 -6 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a
C. All wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA standard 72A, NEC and applicable state and
local regulations. Wiring shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's wiring
diagram and shall be free from grounds, opens and shorts.
D. System shall be installed complete in a conduit system.
3.3 DRAWINGS
A. The installation drawings shall be performed on AutoCAD for compatibility with the as-
built software, show point-to-point wiring diagrams, floor plan, conduit runs and device
locations.
3.4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Complete maintenance instructions for all devices including trouble shooting procedures
shall be provided to the owner. Owners personnel shall receive six hours of hands on
system training.
3.5 TESTING
A. The system upon completion of the installation by the electrical contractor shall be
checked by a factory trained technician in the employ of a factory franchised dealer for
the system installed.
B. Each device shall be tested for proper operation and auxiliary function.
C. A print out of the entire test procedure shall be given to the engineer with a letter of
certification for the completed fire alarm system.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Five sets of manuals shall be given to the engineer at the conclusion of the project.
Manuals are to contain as-built drawings on disk utilizing AutoCAD, spare parts list,
operating procedures, trouble shooting guide, FCP program print out, FCP data file on
disk and a one year service proposal on the system.
END OF SECTION
August 2014 16721 -7 6687/Durham O&M Phase 1a